JP6218283B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin and operates a start lever, rotation of a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface starts and a stop button is operated. Then, a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine is known in which the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped and a privilege is given according to the combination of symbols displayed as a result.

  In such a gaming machine, when an operation to the start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”) is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the lottery result is referred to as “internal winning” In addition, the stepping motor is controlled by driving the stepping motor to start rotation of a plurality of reels. When an operation to the stop button (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”) is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor Is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that performs a reel effect during a reel acceleration process is known (Patent Document 1).

  Specifically, a reel effect data selection index is acquired according to the reel effect pattern, a reel effect code index is acquired based on the acquired reel effect data selection index, and excitation is performed based on the acquired reel effect code index. By acquiring the data address and executing the reel effect by executing the excitation output control of the stepping motor based on the excitation data table indicated by the acquired excitation data address, even if the variation of the reel effect pattern is increased, It is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related thereto.

JP 2014-100198 A

  However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, the reel effect code index is preliminarily associated with a set of excitation data addresses, that is, a set of excitation data tables. Even if the reels are out of position due to a strong impact on the gaming machine during the reel production or due to contact with the reel, the reel production can be performed while the reel is displaced. There is a problem that the player may not be able to enjoy the intended reel effect.

  Of course, it is conceivable to always monitor the symbol position of the reel before the start of the reel effect or during the reel effect. However, in this case, there is a problem that the control burden is remarkably increased.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and the object of the present invention is to reduce the deviation even when the symbol position of the reel is shifted before the start of the reel effect or during the reel effect. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be adjusted without increasing the control burden so that a player can enjoy an intended reel effect.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) that variably display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a reel normal control that normally controls the plurality of reels to advance the game. Means (for example, a normal reel control process by the main CPU 51) and a reel effect determination means (for example, a lock lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining the type of effect according to the symbol variation mode of the plurality of reels when a predetermined condition is satisfied. And a reel effect control means (for example, a reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) for controlling an effect (for example, a reel action) according to a pattern variation mode of the plurality of reels, the reel effect The control means applies excitation to each of the plurality of reels according to the type of the effect determined by the reel effect determining means. Reel effect selection data determining means for determining reel effect selection data associated with the force selection data (for example, the process of S276 in the reel effect control process under the control of the main CPU 51), and the reel effect selection data determination. Based on the reel production selection data determined by the means, the type of the excitation output table in which the rotation direction and the rotation amount of the reel are determined, or at least the production symbol position that is the symbol position at which the production on the reel is started. Excitation output selection data determination means (for example, the process of S277 in the reel effect control process under the control of the main CPU 51) that determines the type of symbol position adjustment data indicating that adjustment is to be performed as excitation output selection data, and the excitation output As the selection data for excitation output by the selection data determining means Effect symbol position adjustment means for adjusting the effect symbol position when the symbol position adjustment data is determined (for example, reel effect adjustment output processing by the main CPU 51), the effect symbol position adjustment means The excitation output table corresponding to the type of the symbol position adjustment data and the effect symbol position is selected (for example, the process of S294, the process of S297, the process of S300 in the reel effect adjustment output process under the control of the main CPU 51, And performing the processing of S308), the effect symbol position is adjusted.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when an excitation output table is determined as excitation output selection data, excitation output control is performed using the excitation output table, and symbol position adjustment is performed as excitation output selection data. When the data is determined, the excitation output table corresponding to the type of symbol position adjustment data and the effect symbol position is selected, and the excitation output control is performed using the selected excitation output table. For example, the reel symbol position can be adjusted only when it is desired to produce an effect based on the reel symbol variation mode in a state where a predetermined symbol (for example, “Red 7” symbol) is aligned. Even if there is a deviation in the symbol position of the reel before the start of the production or during the production due to the design variation of the reel, this deviation increases the control burden. And Ku adjustment can be enjoyed to the player an effect due to symbol variation aspect of intended reels.

  According to the present invention, even if a deviation occurs in the symbol position of the reel before the start of the reel production or during the reel production, the deviation is adjusted without increasing the control burden, and the intended reel The player can enjoy the performance.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external structure of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the state of a front panel in the state where a movable part is in an initial position in a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the state of the front panel in the state where the movable part is in the effect position in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front panel in the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, in a state where the front door is opened. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit with which the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the bonus combination memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the replay combination memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small combination memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small combination memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for general gaming states memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RB game states memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for a small combination and replay memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for bonus memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the stop operation order with respect to the internal winning combination in a pachislot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention, and a winning combination. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the push order small part in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention, (b) is the structure of the push order small part in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the push order small part when not applying. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storing area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area allocated to in-RAM. It is a figure which shows the carryover combination storage area allocated to in-RAM. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement stop button storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the effect game state storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the reel action lottery table for main CZ states memorize | stored in main ROM. (A) is a pseudo game number lottery table stored in the main ROM, (b) is a pseudo internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM, (c) is a highly accurate transition lottery table stored in the main ROM, ( FIG. 6D is a diagram showing a lottery table for lots of highly secured obstacles stored in the main ROM, and FIG. 5E is a drawing showing a pseudo probability variation state end lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the reel action lottery table for fixed roles memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the mode suggestion effect lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the example of estimation of the number of remaining games by the remaining game number suggestion effect in the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the point addition lottery table during AT memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the AT number addition lottery table in the addition state memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the point addition lottery table in the addition state memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the data for reel production selection memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the excitation output table for effects memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the production symbol position search data memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power activation performed in the main control process shown in FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process in the pseudo probability change state performed in the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing lottery processing during normal game executed in the lock lottery processing shown in FIG. 46. 43 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game process executed in the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49; It is a flowchart which shows the state management process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an in-AT state management process executed in the state management process shown in FIG. 51. It is a flowchart which shows the external signal output management process performed in the state management process shown in FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a game end lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process by control of the main CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 57 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. 57 is a flowchart showing communication data transmission processing executed in the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 55. 56 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. It is a flowchart which shows the reel production control process performed in the reel control process shown in FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a reel effect adjustment output process executed in the reel effect control process shown in FIG. 59. 60 is a flowchart showing a reel effect adjustment output process executed in the reel effect control process shown in FIG. 59. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol position update process performed in the reel production | presentation adjustment output process shown in FIG.60 and FIG.61. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 64 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. 64 is a flowchart showing a sound control task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task activated in a mother task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 66. FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing effect content determination processing executed in the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 67. FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68. FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing processing in an added state executed in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 69. FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-probability changing state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a normal game process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69. FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an AT entry process that is executed in the normal game process shown in FIG. 72 and the lock command reception process shown in FIG. 74; FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a lock command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a winning action command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42 according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a game start time lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42 according to another embodiment of the present invention. 56 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of stop operation continuation suggestion effect based on other embodiment of this invention.

  A pachislot machine, which is a specific example of a gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, a functional flow of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

[Function flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, a pachislot machine (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later) is predetermined when a medal is inserted by a player and a start lever (for example, a start lever 16 described later) is operated. One value (hereinafter referred to as a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 51 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. In other words, the internal winning combination determining means is configured to select a predetermined combination from a plurality of combinations based on detection of a unit game start operation on a start lever (establishment of a predetermined start condition) by a start switch (for example, a start switch 16S described later). The internal winning combination is determined by the winning probability.

  By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed along the winning line is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as medal payout, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called “losing” Such a thing is provided.

  In addition, the pachislot machine can perform control to stop the progress of the game. Such control is referred to as “freeze” or “lock”. For convenience, the control that stops the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is called “game start lock”, and the control that stops the progress of the game executed at the end of the game is called “game end lock”. Call. That is, the “lock at the start of game” means that an operation to a stop button (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R described later) is not effective for a predetermined period after the start lever is operated. This means that the progress of the game is stopped, and “lock at the end of the game” means that the bet button is operated or the start lever is operated for a predetermined period after the stop button is operated. This is a control in which the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that is not effective. Of course, the trigger of “freeze” or “lock” is not limited to the above. For example, after the start lever 16 is operated and any of the stop buttons is operated, It is also possible to perform control that does not enable the above operation.

  The internal winning combination determination means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines whether to perform “freeze” or “lock” in place of the internal winning combination or together with the internal winning combination. Also good. At that time, whether a plurality of random numbers are extracted, an internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random numbers, and “freeze” or “lock” is performed based on the other random number It may be determined whether or not.

  Subsequently, after a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described later) are rotated, when a stop button is pressed by the player, reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 62 described later). Stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, which will be described later, perform control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 1 symbol. The maximum number of sliding pieces is not limited to these and can be set as appropriate.

  The reel stop control means uses the specified time to determine the winning line (hereinafter referred to as the winning combination line) in which the symbol combination is validated when the internal winning combination allowing the display of the symbol combination related to winning is determined. The rotation of the reel is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that it is displayed as much as possible along the “effective line”.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols so that they are not displayed along the effective line using the specified time. Stop rotating.

  Further, when the determined internal winning combination is to change the combination of symbols to be displayed according to the predetermined stop operation order, the reel stop control means also determines the predetermined stop operation order. Referring to the control, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped.

  Thus, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning.

  That is, the winning determination means determines whether or not the winning combination is based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the change of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop operation that is performed first when all reels are rotating is the first stop operation, the second stop operation that is performed after the first stop operation is the second stop operation, The stop operation performed after the 2 stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  In the pachislot machine, various effects are performed by the effect execution means (notification means) in the above-described series of flows. These effects include video display performed by a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later), light output performed by a lamp (for example, a lamp group 21 described later), and speakers (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later). The sound is output by the above or a combination thereof.

  When the start lever is operated by the player, in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination, other lottery processing, for example, a random number value for production (hereinafter referred to as a random number value for production) is extracted. The

  When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determining means (for example, a sub-CPU 81 described later) determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the content of the production is determined, the production execution means is linked to each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, or when the presence / absence of a prize is determined. To perform the production.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine, the player has an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided and the player's interest is improved.

[Pachislot machine structure]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 3 is a front panel of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention in a state where the movable part is in the initial position. FIG. 4 is a front view of the front panel in a state where the movable part is in the effect position in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the front panel of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 6 shows the internal structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the state where the door opened.

  The pachislo machine 1 is a gaming machine that uses a game medium such as a coin, medal, game ball, token, or the like, or a game medium such as a card that stores information on a game value assigned to a player. However, in the following description, medals are used.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that is a main body that accommodates a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that is put on when carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3) showing a specific example of the display device, and a waist panel 12. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side inside the cabinet 2a. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and executes an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, the entire display unit 11a including the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is used to display an image and execute an effect.

  The display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the three reel arrangement regions when viewed from the front (player side), and are positioned in front of the three reels (player side). Is provided. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R through the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows stops. The size is set so that three symbols can be displayed. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, upper, middle and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. In this embodiment, a line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R is used as a winning line for determining whether or not a prize is won. Define.

  The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is disposed so as to overlap the display unit 11 a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and covers a decorative frame 101 having a panel opening 101 a that exposes the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a front surface of the decorative frame 101. And a protective cover 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 5).

  As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative frame 101 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a panel opening 101a. The decorative frame 101 includes an upper frame portion 111, a lower frame portion 112, a left frame portion 113, and a right frame portion 114. The decorative frame 101 is formed such that a pattern is generated on the surface by mixing a resin with a mixture and performing injection molding. In order to generate a pattern on the surface by such molding, for example, the position of the injection gate may be adjusted.

  The upper frame portion 111 is provided with a plurality of upper engagement holes 111a that open forward. The openings of the plurality of upper engagement holes 111a are each formed in a horizontally long rectangle. An upper engagement piece 126 (described later) of the protective cover 102 is inserted into the plurality of upper engagement holes 111a.

  Further, the left frame portion 113 is provided with a plurality of left engagement holes 113a that open forward, and the right frame portion 114 is provided with a plurality of right engagement holes 114a that open forward. The openings of the plurality of left engagement holes 113a and right engagement holes 114a are each formed in a vertically long rectangle. A left engagement piece 127 and a right engagement piece 128, which will be described later, of the protective cover 102 are inserted into the plurality of left engagement holes 113a and right engagement holes 114a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the protective cover 102 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and includes a front surface portion 121 facing forward, an upper surface portion 122 facing upward, and a lower surface portion 123 facing downward. And a left side surface portion 124 and a right side surface portion 125 facing sideways.

  Switch notches 121a and 121b for exposing later-described effect switches 22L and 22R are formed in the lower portion of the front surface portion 121. These switch notches 121a and 121b are formed in an arc shape corresponding to the outer shape of the production switches 22L and 22R.

  A plurality of upper engagement pieces 126 are provided on the end surface of the upper surface portion 122. The plurality of upper engagement pieces 126 are formed in a flat plate shape having a plane substantially orthogonal to the vertical direction, and have flexibility. Further, on the upper surface (one plane) of the plurality of upper engagement pieces 126, engagement protrusions 126a are provided.

  When the upper engagement piece 126 is inserted into the plurality of upper engagement holes 111 a of the decorative frame 101, the engagement protrusion 126 a engages with the upper frame portion 111 of the decorative frame 101, and the protective cover 102 comes off from the decorative frame 101. Can not be.

  The left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 of the protective cover 102 are continuous with the front surface portion 121 at an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 have a protruding piece 124A and a protruding piece 125A that protrude forward from the front surface portion 121. End surfaces facing the front of the left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 are end surfaces on the protruding piece 124A and the protruding piece 125A side, and are formed in an arc shape so that the central portion protrudes most forward.

  A plurality of right engagement pieces 128 are provided on the end surface facing the rear side of the right side surface portion 125. The left side surface portion 124 is provided with a plurality of left engagement pieces 127 (not shown) in the same manner as the right engagement piece 128 in the right side surface portion 125. The plurality of left engagement pieces 127 and the plurality of right engagement pieces 128 are formed in a flat plate shape having a plane substantially orthogonal to the left-right direction.

  The right side surface portion 125 is provided with a decoration portion 125a. The decorative portion 125 a is formed by applying a texture to a part of the outer surface of the right side surface portion 125. The decorative portion 125a emits light upon receiving light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided in the back of the right engagement hole 114a of the decorative frame 101. In the right side surface 125, a region where the decorative portion 125a is not provided is a light transmitting portion that transmits light.

  Further, the left side surface portion 124 is provided with a decorative portion (not shown) similar to the decorative portion 125a of the right side surface portion 125. A decorative portion (not shown) of the left side surface portion 124 receives light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided in the back of the left engagement hole 113a of the decorative frame 101 and emits light. In the left side surface portion 124, a region where the decoration portion is not provided is a light transmitting portion that transmits light.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the decorative frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and effect switches 22 </ b> L and 22 </ b> R. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, the lamps 21a and 21b in FIG. The lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect content. The effect switches 22L and 22R are provided on the left and right sides of the decorative frame 101, respectively.

  A central movable unit 105, a left movable unit 106, and a right movable unit 107 are attached to the decorative frame 101.

  The central movable unit 105 is disposed in the central portion above the interior of the decorative frame 101 and has a movable part 309 described later. For example, when a specific effect is performed, the central movable unit 105 rotates the movable component 309 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about the axis extending in the left-right direction and from below the decorative cover 364. Lower. Thereby, the movable component 309 moves to an effect position (see FIG. 4) that covers a part of the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the movable part 309 includes a character part 323, an arch cover 324, and a light emitting display part 325. When the movable part 309 is arranged at the effect position, the character part 323 and the arch cover 324 are arranged. The light emitting display unit 325 is visible from the front of the pachislot machine 1. Although not shown, the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 are individually formed with transmissive regions that transmit light emitted from LEDs (not shown) provided on the back surfaces thereof. Yes. In particular, the light-emitting display unit 325 includes a plurality of (for example, three) transmissive regions formed in parallel so that a plurality of levels (for example, three levels) of lighting display can be performed in stages.

  The left movable unit 106 is disposed on the left side in the decorative frame 101 and has a left door 188 described later. The right movable unit 107 is arranged on the right side in the decorative frame 101 and has a right door 189 described later. The left door 188 and the right door 189 are formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape having an appropriate thickness, and one plane faces forward in the initial position.

  For example, when a predetermined effect is performed, the left movable unit 106 rotates the left door 188 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the vertical direction. Further, the right movable unit 107 rotates the right door 189 at the initial position around an axis extending in the vertical direction when, for example, a predetermined effect is performed. In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined effect is performed, either the left door 188 or the right door 189 may be rotated, or both the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a pedestal portion 13 is formed on the waist panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15A, 1BET button 15B, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, checkout button 18) to be operated by the player. ing.

  The medal slot 14 is provided for receiving a medal dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 14 are used for one game up to a predetermined number (for example, three), and the amount exceeding the predetermined number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (so-called credits). function).

  The MAX bet button 15A and the 1BET button 15B are provided for determining the number of coins used for one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. In addition, the settlement button 18 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 7) composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 6 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Digital display.

  At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout port 24 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33 described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. In addition, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the production contents.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 6, the cabinet 2a is formed in the substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape by which one surface of the front side was opened. A main board 31 constituting a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls main operations of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of presence / absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in the center of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 6, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor described later (any of stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 7) through a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. .

A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of storing a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided in the lower part of the cabinet 2a. In addition, a power supply device 4 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1 is provided on one side of the hopper 33 (left side in the example shown in FIG. 6) in the cabinet 2a. .

  A sub-board 32 constituting a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 8) to be described later is provided on the upper portion of the back side of the front door 2b (the part opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of effects by displaying images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Furthermore, a selector 35 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2) is appropriate. Guide to 33. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a medal sensor 35 </ b> S (see FIG. 7) that detects that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the configuration of a circuit provided in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating an overall configuration of a circuit included in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 illustrates an internal configuration of the sub-control circuit in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram. The pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control circuit 41, a sub control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) that are electrically connected thereto.

<Main control circuit>
The main control circuit 41 is mainly configured by a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores a control program for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. . The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  Connected to the main CPU 51 are a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56 and a sampling circuit 57. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 51 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 56 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R.

  The stop switch 17S detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R has been pressed (stop operation) by the player. The start switch 16S detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 18S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player.

  The medal sensor 35S detects that a medal inserted into the medal slot 14 has passed through the selector 35. Further, the bet switch 15S detects that the bet button (the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B) has been pressed by the player.

  As peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, thereby determining the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels the number of symbols is). Only managed).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 17 times) necessary for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of a symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is changed to “ 1 "is added. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not medals discharged from the hopper 33 have reached a predetermined payout number. To do.

  Although not shown, an external concentrated terminal plate is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. The external concentration terminal board receives signals such as the number of inserted / withdrawn medals from the main control circuit 41, the number of games, information on the presence / absence of bonus operation, and the like, and displays the number of games, the number of bonus operations, etc. It is output as an external signal to an external display or a game room host computer. The external indicator is installed, for example, above the pachislot machine 1, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games or the bonus operation, or notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

<Sub control circuit>
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . The sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86 as shown in FIG. Further, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, an A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, a central movable unit drive circuit 96, a left movable unit drive circuit 97, and a right movable. A unit driving circuit 98 and a rotating lamp driving circuit 99 are included.

  The sub CPU 81 performs video, sound, and light output control according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a production random number value, and determination of production contents (production data). An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined content of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp group 21, and a speaker A program such as a voice control task for controlling the output of sound by 20L and 20R is included.

  In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effects, a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of video, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control circuit 42 includes the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20 </ b> L and 20 </ b> R, the lamp group 21, the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, the right movable unit 107, and the rotating lamp 543. And other peripheral devices are connected. That is, the operations of these peripheral devices are controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and the created video is the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed.

  Further, the sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the A / D converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM through the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data designated by the contents of the effects. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

  The sub CPU 81 and the central movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the central movable unit 105 in accordance with the central movable unit drive data specified by the contents of effects. That is, the central movable unit 105 is driven when a specific effect is performed, and moves the movable component 309 to a position covering a part of the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 in accordance with the left movable unit drive data designated by the effect contents. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 according to the right movable unit drive data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 81 and the rotating lamp driving circuit 99 drive the rotating lamp 543 according to the rotating lamp driving data designated by the contents of the effect.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-CPU 81 is in a state of notifying a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player according to the determined internal winning combination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Advantageous gaming state control means for controlling the state is configured. Such an advantageous gaming state is referred to as “AT”.

[Changes in gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 will be described. As the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 51 changes two gaming states, a general gaming state (RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) and a BB gaming state (RB gaming state).

<Transition of general gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 51 takes either the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state as the general gaming state. In the RT0 gaming state, when the internal winning combination is a bonus combination (BB in the present embodiment) that is a bonus operating combination, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state.

  The RT0 gaming state is a replay low-probability state (low RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replaying role that is the act of operating the replay is relatively lower than the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay role is relatively higher than the RT0 gaming state.

  Here, there is no direct transition from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. In the RT1 gaming state, the BB is won, the BB gaming state is transitioned, and the BB gaming state is terminated, so that the RT0 gaming state is again entered. Will be migrated.

  In addition, BB is always in an internal winning state after winning an internal winning until winning. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “BB carryover state”. That is, in the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state and the BB carryover state are in an equivalent relationship.

  Note that the RT1 gaming state is not an RT managed by the number of games, but a gaming state that shifts only when the above-described transition condition is satisfied. In that sense, the RT1 gaming state is infinite RT.

<BB game state transition>
Further, when the BB wins, the main CPU 51 shifts the gaming state to the BB gaming state. In the present embodiment, during the BB gaming state, control is always performed during the RB gaming state, and when the BB end condition is satisfied, specifically, the specified number of sheets in the BB gaming state (in this embodiment, 75 sheets). ), The BB gaming state and the RB gaming state are ended, and the state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in a general gaming state internal lottery table, which will be described later in FIG. 15, in the RT1 gaming state, one of the internal winning combinations is always determined by lottery. That is, a unit game that is in the BB carryover state and has not won any small combination or replay combination will occur only in a unit game that has internally won BB. The internal winning combination can be roughly divided into a replay combination, a small combination, and a bonus combination. As shown in FIG. 19 to be described later, in this embodiment, a replay combination and a small combination are provided rather than BB. The stop display is preferentially configured.

  Therefore, when the BB is won internally, but the BB cannot be won in the unit game, until the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (for example, all memory due to a backup error of the main RAM 33 at the time of power-on) Region initialization) The RT1 gaming state will continue.

  The game state transition is not limited to that described above. For example, by providing a plurality of bell lip symbol combinations to be described later, when winning one of the normal lip 1 to 4 or bell lip 1 to 4 described later, the combination of symbols to be awarded is made different depending on the stop operation order, so that one bell lip symbol It is possible to make a transition to the above-described RT1 gaming state when the combination is won, and to shift to the above-described RT0 gaming state when a combination of other bell-lip symbols is won.

  In this case, when controlled to the advantageous gaming state by the sub CPU 81, first, the stop operation sequence in which the combination of the symbols of the one bell lip is won is notified, and by performing the stop operation according to this notification, Transition from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. In the RT1 gaming state, the stop operation sequence in which the other bell-lip symbol combinations do not win is informed, and the stop operation sequence in which the payout of the medal is maximized is informed for each winning combination. Thus, similarly, it is possible to configure an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

[Data table stored in main ROM]
Next, various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the twenty symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions.

  Symbol position data “0” to “19” indicates the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are “Red 7”, “BAR”, “Replay”, “Bell”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, “Watermelon C”, “White Blank” and “Purple Blank” Is included.

  Here, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “watermelon C” only need to be identifiable as having different symbols internally by the main CPU 51. In the present embodiment, like the same symbols. A symbol that can be recognized by the player. Hereinafter, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “watermelon C” are also collectively referred to as “watermelon”.

<Design code table>
As shown in FIG. 11, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and in the present embodiment, it is distinguished by 2 bytes (16 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 11 represents symbol codes as data for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, but is actually stored in the main ROM 52. The symbol arrangement table shows the arrangement of symbol codes for identifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are “red 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, “bell”, “cherry”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, “ There are 10 types of “Watermelon C”, “White Blank” and “Purple Blank”.

  In the symbol code table, “1” is assigned as the symbol code for the “red 7” symbol. Further, “2” is assigned as a symbol code for the “BAR” symbol. Also, “3” is assigned as the symbol code for the “replay” symbol.

  Similarly, “4” to “10” are the symbol codes for the symbols “Bell”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, “Watermelon C”, “White Blank” and “Purple Blank”, respectively. Assigned.

<Design combination table>
In the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, a winning action flag and a payout number are associated with a symbol combination identified by the storage area identification data represented by 27 bytes.

  The winning action flag is data assigned corresponding to a combination of unique symbols for representing a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as “winning winning combination”), and includes 1 byte (8 bits) data and a storage area type. It is out. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data. One byte data includes data corresponding to a combination of a plurality of symbols. Each symbol combination is distinguished by the storage area type and 1-byte data.

  In the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the names (contents) of winning combinations are associated with the winning action flags for the combinations of symbols in order to make the invention easy to understand.

  The number of payouts is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player corresponding to each symbol combination. When the combination of symbols arranged along the effective line matches the “combination of symbols” in the symbol combination table, the number of medals discharged or credits by driving the hopper device 33 is counted based on the corresponding payout number. The credit counter is added.

  FIG. 12 shows a symbol combination table related to the bonus combination. When a combination of symbols of “watermelon B-BAR-white blank” representing a winning combination called “BB” is displayed along the active line in the general gaming state (RT1 gaming state), Although there is no payout, it means that BB is won. That is, when “BB” wins in the general gaming state (RT1 gaming state), the game state shifts to the BB gaming state.

  FIG. 13 shows a symbol combination table related to the replay combination. When the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 13 is displayed along the active line, it indicates that no medal has been paid out, but that the player has won a re-game act. That is, when the replay combination wins, the replay can be performed in the next game.

  In FIG. 13, when a combination of symbols “Replay-Replay-Replay” representing a winning combination called “middle lip” is displayed along the active line, “middle lip” is displayed in the middle in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. "Replay" is available.

  When a combination of symbols “Bell-Replay-Red 7” representing a winning combination called “Cross-up Lip 1” is displayed along the active line, the symbol “ "Replay" is available. “Cross-up Lip 2” to “Cross-Up Lip 4” are the same as “Cross-up Lip 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of “Watermelon A-Replay-Watermelon A” representing a winning combination called “Crossdown Lip 1” is displayed along the active line, it is lowered to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. "Replay" is available. “Crossdown Lip 2” to “Crossdown Lip 6” are the same as “Crossdown Lip 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of “Replay-Bell-Cherry” representing a winning combination called “Bell Lip” is displayed along the active line, “Bell” is aligned to the lower right in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, only the above-described center line is an effective line, but the symbol combination relating to the replay combination is configured as shown in FIG. 13 and will be described later in the description of FIG. The combination of symbols related to small roles (for example, upper bells 1 to 12, cross-up bells 1 to 9, lower bells 1 to 3, cross-down watermelons 1 to 4, etc.) is configured in the same way, as if five lines The center line aligned to the middle, the top line aligned to the upper level, the bottom line aligned to the lower level, the cross-down line aligned to the lower right, and the cross-up line aligned to the upper right) can be impressed by the player. It can be done.

  When a combination of symbols of “Replay-Replay-Cherry” representing a winning combination called “Chance Lip A1” is displayed along the active line, “Bell” is displayed at the upper part of the display window 4L, and the lower part of the display window 4C. “Bell” is displayed on the display window 4R, and “bell” is displayed on the lower part of the display window 4R. That is, two “bells” are displayed on at least one of the five lines described above (for example, the bottom line aligned at the lower stage or the cross-down line aligned at the lower right) (hereinafter, “tempe”). The remaining “bell” is displayed on another line (hereinafter referred to as “tempered off”). As for “Chance Lip A2” to “Chance Lip A5” and “Chance Lip B1” to “Chance Lip B3”, “Bell” is out of the tempering in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, similarly to “Chance Lip A1”. Is displayed.

  When a combination of symbols “Bell-Watermelon A-Watermelon A” representing a winning combination called “Special Lip A1” is displayed along the active line, “Watermelon” is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It is displayed outside the temper. “Special Lip A2” to “Special Lip A6” and “Special Lip B” are the same as “Special Lip A1”.

  When a combination of symbols “BAR-BAR-BAR” representing a winning combination called “BAR Lip A” is displayed along the active line, “BAR” is displayed in the middle in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It's aligned. When the symbol combination “REPLAY-BAR-CHERRY” representing the winning combination called “BAR RIP E” is displayed along the active line, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R BAR "may be available.

  When a combination of symbols “BAR-BAR-Watermelon A” representing a winning combination called “BAR Lip B1” is displayed along the active line, “BAR” is displayed as a template in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. Displayed out of place. “BAR lip B2”, “BAR lip B3”, “BAR lip C”, “BAR lip D1”, and “BAR lip D2” are the same as “BAR lip B1”.

  When a combination of symbols “Bell-BAR-Watermelon A” representing a winning combination called “BAR Lip B4” is displayed along the active line, “Replay” is displayed at the bottom in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. Is complete. “BAR lip B5” and “BAR lip B6” are the same as “BAR lip B4”.

  When a combination of symbols “Cherry-ANY-ANY” representing a winning combination called “Cherry Lip A” is displayed along the active line, “Cherry” is displayed in the middle of the display window 4L. “ANY” indicates that any symbol may be used. That is, in “Cherry Lip A”, if “Cherry” is displayed in the middle of the display window 4L, it is a combination of symbols in which a winning is determined regardless of the symbols displayed in the display windows 4C and 4R. ing.

  When a combination of symbols “Watermelon A-Red 7-Cherry” representing a winning combination called “Cherry Lip B1” is displayed along the active line, “Red 7” is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. May be displayed out of balance, but basically, the symbol displayed when the symbol “cherry” in “cherry lip A” described above cannot be displayed in the middle of the display window 4L. Is defined as a combination of “Cherry Lip B2” to “Cherry Lip B8” and “Cherry Lip C” are the same as “Cherry Lip B1”.

  14a and 14b show a symbol combination table related to a small combination with a medal payout. When the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14a and 14b are displayed along the active line, the payout number of medals associated with the symbol combination is paid out.

  When the symbol combination “Replay-Watermelon A-Watermelon A” representing the winning combination called “Upper Bell 1” is displayed along the active line, the upper “bell” is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. ”And 7 medals are paid out. “Upper bell 2” to “upper bell 12” are the same as “upper bell 1”.

  When the combination of symbols of “Watermelon A-Bell-Watermelon A” representing the winning combination called “Cross-up Bell 1” is displayed along the active line, it is raised to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. "Bell" is ready and 7 medals are paid out. “Cross-up bell 2” to “cross-up bell 9” are the same as “cross-up bell 1”.

  When a combination of symbols “BAR-Bell-Replay” representing a winning combination called “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1” is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out. “Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A9” to “Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A9” and “Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer B1” to “Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer B9” are the same as “Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A1”.

  As described later in the description of FIG. 19, “middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer” means, for example, that “middle left and right cross-up bell 1” is determined as an internal winning combination as “push order small combination”. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the "middle left and right" stop operation sequence, one of "cross-up bell 1" to "cross-up bell 9" wins and 7 medals are paid out. However, when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the “middle right left” stop operation sequence, the stop operation sequence of the first stop operation is correct, but the stop operation of the second stop operation is performed. Since the order is incorrect, one of “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1” to “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A9” wins and one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols “Watermelon A-Watermelon A-Bell” representing a winning combination called “Right 1st Incorrect Answer A1” is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out. “Right 1st incorrect answer A2” to “Right 1st incorrect answer A4” and “Right 1st incorrect answer B1” to “Right 1st incorrect answer B4” are the same as “Right 1st incorrect answer A1”.

  Note that “right 1st incorrect answer” means that, for example, “middle left and right cross-up bell 1” is determined as an internal winning combination as “push order small combination” as described later in the description of FIG. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the "middle left and right" stop operation sequence, one of "cross-up bell 1" to "cross-up bell 9" wins and 7 medals are paid out. However, when “right”, that is, when the stop button 17R is operated for the first stop, the stop operation order is incorrect, so when “missing” described later does not occur, “right 1st incorrect answer”. One of “A1” to “Right 1st incorrect answer A4” or “Right 1st incorrect answer B1” to “Right 1st incorrect answer B4” is won and one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols “Bell-Bell-Bell” representing a winning combination called “middle bell” is displayed along the active line, “bells” are aligned in the middle in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. , 7 medals will be paid out.

  When a combination of symbols “watermelon A-purple blank-bell” representing a winning combination called “right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1” is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out. “Right 1st2nd incorrect answer A6” to “Right 1st2nd incorrect answer A6” and “Right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1” to “Right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6” are the same as “Right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1”.

  Note that “right 1st2nd incorrect answer” means, for example, that “right left middle middle bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination as “push order small combination” as described later in the description of FIG. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the "middle" stop operation sequence, the "middle bell" wins and seven medals are paid out, but the "right middle left" stop operation When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in order, the stop operation order of the first stop operation is correct, but the stop operation order of the second stop operation is incorrect. One of “correct answer A1” to “right 1st2nd incorrect answer A6” wins and one medal is paid out.

  However, for “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1” to “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6”, “middle left and right lower bell 1” to “middle right and left lower bell 3”, “middle right left lower bell 1” -If any of “middle right left lower bell 3” is determined as an internal winning combination, if “right”, that is, if the stop button 17R is first stopped, the stop operation sequence is incorrect. In this case, “missing out”, which will be described later, does not occur, and any one of “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1” to “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6” wins and one medal is paid out. Therefore, it can be said that the right winning 1st incorrect answer in the case of the internal winning combination described above, except that “missing” described later does not occur.

  Also, any of “Right and middle left lower bell 1” to “Right middle left lower bell 3”, “Right middle left bottom bell 1” to “Right middle left bottom bell 3” as an internal winning combination When determined, if “medium”, that is, if the stop button 17C is first stopped, the stop operation order is incorrect, but in this case, “missing” described later does not occur, One of “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1” to “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6” wins and one medal is paid out. Therefore, it can be said that the internal winning combination described above is a “medium 1st incorrect answer” described later, except that “missing” described later does not occur.

  When a combination of symbols “Bell-Cherry-BAR” representing a winning combination called “medium 1st incorrect answer A1” is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out. “Middle 1st incorrect answer A4” and “Middle 1st incorrect answer A4” and “Middle 1st incorrect answer B1” to “Middle 1st incorrect answer B4” are also the same as “Middle 1st incorrect answer A1”.

  Note that “middle 1st incorrect answer” means, for example, “right / left / middle middle bell 1” is determined as an internal winning combination as “push order small combination” as described later in the description of FIG. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the “middle” stop operation sequence, “middle bell” wins and seven medals are paid out, but “middle”, that is, the stop button 17C When the first stop operation is performed, the stop operation order is incorrect. Therefore, when “missing” described later does not occur, “medium 1st incorrect answer A1” to “medium 1st incorrect answer A4” or “ This indicates that any one of “medium 1st incorrect answer B1” to “medium 1st incorrect answer B4” wins and one medal is paid out.

  When the combination of symbols “Watermelon A-Replay-Cherry” representing the winning combination called “Lower Bell 1” is displayed along the active line, “Bell” is displayed in the lower row in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. And 7 medals are paid out. “Lower bell 2” and “lower bell 3” are the same as “lower bell 1”.

  When the combination of symbols of “Red 7-Watermelon A-Bell” representing the winning combination called “Crossdown Watermelon 1” is displayed along the active line, it is lowered to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. “Watermelon” is available and 3 medals are paid out. “Crossdown watermelon 2” to “crossdown watermelon 4” are the same as “crossdown watermelon 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of “watermelon B-watermelon A-watermelon A” representing a winning combination called “middle watermelon 1” is displayed along the active line, “middle watermelon 1” is displayed in the middle in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. "Watermelon" is complete and 3 medals are paid out. The “middle watermelon 2” to “middle watermelon 6” are the same as the “middle watermelon 1”.

  When the symbol combination “BAR-Cherry-White Blank” representing the winning combination called “Square Cherry A1-1” is displayed along the active line, “Cherry” is displayed at the bottom of the display window 4L. And 3 medals are paid out. “Corner Cherry A1-2” to “Corner Cherry A1-8”, “Corner Cherry B1-1” to “Corner Cherry B1-4”, “Corner Cherry B2-1” to “Corner Cherry B2-24”, “Corner” "Cherry B3-1" to "Kaku Cherry B3-4", "Kaku Cherry B4-1" to "Kaku Cherry B4-3", "Kaku Cherry B5-1" to "Kaku Cherry B5-4", "Kaku Cherry C1" -1 "to" Kaku Cherry C1-8 "," Kaku Cherry C2-1 "to" Kaku Cherry C2-12 "," Kaku Cherry C3-1 "to" Kaku Cherry C3-6 "," Kaku Cherry C4-1 " ”To“ Square Cherry C4-3 ”,“ Cherry ”is displayed in the upper or lower part of the display window 4L in the same manner as“ Square Cherry A1-1 ”.

  When a combination of symbols “watermelon B-bell-bell” representing a winning combination called “special combination A” is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out. “Special role B” and “Special role C” are the same as “Special role A”.

  Here, when “weak cherry”, “strong cherry 1”, or “strong cherry 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, none of the above-mentioned “horn cherry” can be awarded. In this case, that is, when “cherry” cannot be displayed in the upper or lower part of the display window 4L according to the timing of the stop operation, “special role” is preferentially displayed over “BB”. By performing the stop control, “BB” is defined as a combination of symbols for controlling so as not to win.

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned names are assigned to the combination of symbols related to the replay role and the combination of symbols related to the small role so as to be distinguished from others, but the name is not necessarily the combination of the symbols. The role of is not limited.

<Internal lottery table>
In the plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, lottery values and data pointers for each gaming state are associated with the winning number. The internal lottery table is normally stored in the main ROM 52 for each set value (for example, set values 1 to 6) of the pachislot machine 1. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, explanation will be made using one internal lottery table.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for lottery extracted from the predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that assigned data (that is, data pointer) is determined. When the number of times of the determination process for determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process is “lost”.

  The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”. In the present embodiment, by using a plurality of types of internal lottery tables, the type of internal winning combination to be determined and the winning probability are changed, and as a result, the player's expectation is undulated.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data for designating an internal winning combination defined by an internal winning combination determination table described later.

  That is, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data in the small combination / replay winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17 and the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. . For the data pointer, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

  The method of the internal lottery process is not limited to the above-described method. For example, a lottery value corresponding to each winning number is selected from a predetermined random number range “0 to 65535”. An internal lottery may be performed by sequentially adding values and determining whether the result of the addition has reached a predetermined value (for example, a value determined in advance for each winning number).

(Internal lottery table for general gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 15, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state referred to in the general gaming state defines lottery values for the winning numbers in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state. In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the winning numbers “1” to “45” in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state are associated with the small role / replay data pointers “1” to “45”, respectively. Note that “(between the BB flags)” in the RT1 gaming state is synonymous with the “BB carryover state” described above.

  In the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, the winning numbers “1” to “16” and “46” are different, and the winning numbers “17” to “45” are the same. The winning number “46” is associated with “1” as the bonus data pointer, and when BB is determined as the internal winning combination, only BB is determined as the internal winning combination (winning alone). Is set.

  Specifically, in the RT0 gaming state, when the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16” are added together, “8978” is set, and the lottery value of the winning number “46” is set to “5851”. ing. On the other hand, in the RT1 gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16” are set to “14829”, which is set higher than that in the RT0 gaming state, and the lottery number of the winning number “46” is set. The value is set to “0”. That is, the lottery value corresponding to the difference of the winning number “46” is assigned to the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16”.

(Internal lottery table for RB gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 16, the RB gaming state internal lottery table referred to in the RB gaming state defines lottery values of the winning numbers in the RB gaming state. In the RB gaming state internal lottery table, the winning numbers “1” and “2” are associated with the small role / replay data pointers “46” and “47”, respectively. In the present embodiment, since the RB gaming state is always in the BB gaming state, the RB gaming state internal lottery table can also be referred to as the BB gaming state internal lottery table.

<Internal winning combination determination table for small role / replay>
In the internal winning combination determination table for a small combination / replay shown in FIG. 17, data for identifying a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted is associated with the data pointer for small combination / replay. ing.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination / replay shown in FIG. 17, for the sake of convenience, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted for the data pointer for the small combination / replay, and the name (contents) of the winning combination, The name of the internal winning combination (remarks) is associated.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of symbol combinations (winning operation flags) for which winning is permitted are associated with one data pointer, so that a plurality of combinations can be achieved in one internal lottery process. The winning of a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) can be permitted. These internal lottery methods are called “simultaneous winning” method and “overlapping winning” method.

  In the present embodiment, one symbol combination (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted can be defined as “internal winning combination”, and winning is permitted for one data pointer. A combination of a plurality of symbols (winning action flag) can be defined as an internal winning combination, but in FIGS. 17 to 20, the latter is defined as an internal winning combination.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determining table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “0” is associated with “losing”.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “1” indicates “normal lip 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “middle stage lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, “cross-down lip 1-6” and “bell lip” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “2” indicates “normal lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “middle stage lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, “cross-down lip 1-6”, “bell lip”, and “special lip A1-6” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “3” indicates “normal lip 3” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “middle stage lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, “cross-down lip 1-6”, “bell lip”, and “special lip B” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “4” indicates “normal lip 4” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, “cross-down lip 1-6”, “bell lip”, “special lip A1-6” and “special lip B” are associated. It has been.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “5” indicates “bell lip 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols permitted to win a prize ( As the winning action flag), “middle lip” and “bell lip” are associated.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “6” indicates “bell lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols permitted to win a prize ( As “winning operation flags”, “middle lip”, “bell lip”, and “special lip A1 to 6” are associated.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “7” indicates “BELL lip 3” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols permitted to win a prize ( As “winning operation flags”, “middle stage lip”, “bell lip”, and “special lip B” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “8” for the small role / replay indicates “BELLIP 4” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is permitted to win ( As “winning operation flags”, “middle lip”, “bell lip”, “special lip A1-6” and “special lip B” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “9” indicates “chance lip 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flags), “chance lip A1-5” and “chance lip B1-3” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “10” indicates “chance lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flags), “chance lip A1-5”, “chance lip B1-3”, and “bell lip” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “11” indicates “strong chance lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “middle stage lip”, “special lip A1 to 6”, and “special lip B” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “12” indicates “cherry lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( “BAR RIP B1-6”, “BAR RIP C”, “BAR RIP D1, 2”, “BAR RIP E”, “CHERRY RIP A”, and “CHERRY RIP B1-8” are associated with each other. It has been.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “13” indicates “strong cherry lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “BAR Lip B1-6”, “BAR Lip C”, “BAR Lip D1, 2”, “BAR Lip E”, “Cherry Lip A”, “Cherry Lip B1-8”, “ “BAR Lip A” and “Cherry Lip C” are associated with each other.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “14” indicates “BAR lip 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. (Medium stage lip), “Cross-up lip 1-4”, “BAR lip A”, “BAR lip B1-6”, “BAR lip C” and “BAR lip D1, 2” are supported as (winning operation flag) It is attached.

  In the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “15” for the small role / replay indicates “BAR Lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, “BAR lip A”, “BAR lip B1-6”, “BAR lip C”, “BAR lip D1, 2”, “ “Bell Lip” and “BAR Lip E” are associated with each other.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “16” for the small role / replay indicates “fake BAR lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, and “BAR lip D1, 2” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “17” indicates “middle left / right cross-up bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 1”, “cross-up bell 1-9”, “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-9” and “right 1st incorrect answer A1-4” are associated. .

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “18” indicates “middle left / right cross-up bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 2”, “cross-up bell 1-9”, “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-9” and “right 1st incorrect answer A1-4” are associated. .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “19” indicates “middle left / right cross-up bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 3”, “cross-up bell 1-9”, “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-9” and “right 1st incorrect answer A1-4” are associated. .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “20” indicates “middle right / left cross-up bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 4”, “cross-up bell 1-9”, “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-9” and “right 1st incorrect answer B1-4” are associated. .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “21” indicates “middle right / left cross-up bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 5”, “cross-up bell 1-9”, “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-9” and “right 1st incorrect answer B1-4” are associated. .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “22” indicates “middle right / left cross-up bell 3” as the internal winning combination and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 6”, “cross-up bell 1-9”, “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-9” and “right 1st incorrect answer B1-4” are associated. .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “23” indicates “right middle left bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and a winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bell 7), "middle bell", "right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer A1-4".

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “24” indicates “right / left / middle middle bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bell 8), "middle bell", "right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer A1-4".

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “25” for the small role / replay indicates “right / left / middle middle bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bell 9), "middle bell", "right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer A1-4".

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “26” indicates “right middle left middle bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 10”, “middle bell”, “right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-6” and “middle 1st incorrect answer B1-4” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “27” indicates “right middle left middle bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 11”, “middle bell”, “right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-6” and “middle 1st incorrect answer B1-4” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “28” indicates “right middle left middle bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 12”, “middle bell”, “right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-6” and “middle 1st incorrect answer B1-4” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “29” indicates “middle left / right / lower bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and a winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bell 1, 2), "lower bell 1-3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-9" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-6". .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the data pointer “30” for small winning combination / replay indicates “middle left and right lower bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bell 3, 4), "lower bell 1-3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-9" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-6". .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “31” indicates “middle left / right lower bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and a winning pattern is permitted. As the combinations (winning operation flags), “upper bells 5, 6”, “lower bells 1-3”, “middle 1st2nd incorrect answers B1-9” and “right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1-6” are associated. .

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “32” indicates “middle right / lower left bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and a winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bells 7, 8), "lower bells 1-3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answers B1-9" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1-6". .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “33” indicates “middle right / lower left bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and a winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bell 9, 10), "lower bell 1-3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-9" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-6". .

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “34” indicates “middle right / lower left bell 3” as an internal winning combination, and a winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bells 11, 12), "lower bells 1-3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answers B1-9" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1-6". .

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “35” for the small role / replay indicates “Right / Left / Middle / Lower Bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As the combination (winning operation flag), “upper bells 1 and 2”, “lower bells 1 to 3” and “right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “36” for the small role / replay indicates “Right / Left / Middle / Lower Bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bells 3, 4), "lower bells 1-3" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1-6".

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “37” for the small role / replay indicates “Right / Left / Middle / Lower Bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. Are associated with (upper bells 5, 6), "lower bells 1-3" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1-6".

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “38” indicates “right middle left lower bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bells 7, 8”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, and “right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small role / replay, the data pointer “39” for small role / replay indicates “right middle left lower bell 2” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bells 9, 10”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, and “right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “40” indicates “right middle left lower bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bells 11 and 12”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, and “right 1st 2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “41” indicates “strong bell” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are permitted to win ( As “winning operation flags”, “upper bells 1 to 12”, “cross-up bells 1 to 9”, and “lower bells 1 to 3” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “42” indicates “watermelon” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols (winning winning) As the operation flag), “cross-down watermelons 1 to 4” and “middle stage watermelons 1 to 6” are associated.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “43” indicates “weak cherry” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that allows winning ( As winning operation flags), “horn cherry A1-1-8”, “horn cherry B3-1-4”, “horn cherry C1-1-8”, “horn cherry C2-1-12”, “horn cherry C3” “-1 to 6”, “horn cherry C4-1 to 3”, “special combination A”, “special combination B”, and “special combination C” are associated with each other.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “44” indicates “strong cherry 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. (Corner Cherry A1-1 to 8), “Corner Cherry B1-1 to 4”, “Corner Cherry B2-1 to 24”, “Corner Cherry B3-1 to 4”, “Corner Cherry” “B4-1-3”, “Square Cherry B5-1-4”, “Square Cherry C2-1-12”, “Special Role A”, “Special Role B”, and “Special Role C” are associated with each other. .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “45” indicates “strong cherry 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. (Corner Cherry A1-1 to 8), “Corner Cherry B1-1 to 4”, “Corner Cherry B2-1 to 24”, “Corner Cherry B3-1 to 4”, “Corner Cherry” “B4-1-3”, “Square Cherry B5-1-4”, “Square Cherry C2-1-12”, “Special Role A”, and “Special Role C” are associated with each other.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “46” indicates “RB medium / small winning combination A” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), “medium 1st2nd incorrect answers A1 to 9” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “47” indicates “RB medium / small winning combination B” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of which winning is permitted is shown. As combinations (winning operation flags), all small combinations (that is, combinations of all symbols shown in FIGS. 14a and 14b) are associated.

  Referring to the RB gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16, “RB small and medium combination A” corresponds to the winning number “1” and wins internally with a winning probability of 39425/65536. On the other hand, referring to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability of “medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-9” associated with “RB medium / small combination A” is 2734 × 6/65536 = 16404. / 65536.

  Further, referring to the internal lottery table for RB gaming state shown in FIG. 16, “RB small and medium combination B” corresponds to the winning number “2” and wins internally with a winning probability of 16406/65536. On the other hand, referring to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability is the highest among the combinations of symbols (winning operation flag) that are allowed to win in association with “RB small and medium role B”. Are “cross-up bells 1 to 9” corresponding to the winning numbers “17” to “22” and “41”, and the winning probability is (2734 × 6 + 1) / 65536 = 16405/65536.

  Therefore, in the RB gaming state, a winning probability higher than that in the general gaming state, that is, a winning probability that is more advantageous to the player, is set for each symbol combination (winning operation flag) in which winning is permitted.

<Bonus internal winning combination determination table>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, data for identifying the internal winning combination is associated with the bonus data pointer.

  Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, for convenience, the internal winning combination data is omitted from the bonus data pointer, and the name (contents) of the winning combination and the name of the internal winning combination ( Remarks) are associated with each other.

  In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer “0” is associated with “losing”. In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer “1” indicates “BB” as the internal winning combination, and “ BB "is associated.

[Relationship between stop operation order for internal winning combination and winning combination]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the relationship between the stop operation sequence for the internal winning combination and the winning combination will be described.

  In FIG. 19, as the order of stop operations, “left middle right” means that stop operations are performed in the order of the stop button 17L, stop button 17C, and stop button 17R, and “middle left and right” means stop button 17L, The stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17R and the stop button 17C, and “middle left and right” means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17C, the stop button 17L, and the stop button 17R. “Right left” means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17C, the stop button 17R, and the stop button 17L, and “Right left middle” is performed in the order of the stop button 17R, the stop button 17L, and the stop button 17C. "Right middle left" means stop button 17R, stop button 17C, it means that the order stop operation of the stop buttons 17L is made.

<Outline of reel stop>
In the present embodiment, a plurality of combinations of symbols permitted to win a prize are associated with one internal winning combination, and at what timing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated (stop) Depending on the operation timing) and in what order (stop operation order), the final winning combination to be displayed may be controlled to vary.

  That is, regarding which symbol combination is finally displayed on the active line (in other words, as the basic information when the main CPU 51 executes the reel stop control), It is determined based on the following three elements.

  The first element is an internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. For example, when the result of the internal lottery process is “losing” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “0”), a combination of symbols related to any of the replay roles, or a combination of symbols related to the small role Will never be displayed on the active line.

  The second element is the player's stop operation timing (in other words, the position of the symbol when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, four symbols are determined as the maximum number of sliding pieces, so that even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process, winning is permitted by that. If there are more than 4 symbols in the symbol combination, the symbol combinations permitted to win may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. . This is called so-called “missing”. In FIG. 19, “or lost” means that there is this “missing”. Therefore, in the same figure, when “or lose” is not written, it means that at least one of the displayed winning combinations is displayed and there is no “missing”. .

  The third element is the stop operation order of the player. For example, when the result of the internal lottery process is “normal lip 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “1”), regardless of the stop operation order, regardless of the stop operation timing, As shown in FIG. 19, a combination of symbols related to one of the replay combinations is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle left / right cross-up bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “17”), Regardless of the stop operation timing, if any combination of symbols of “Cross-up Bells 1-9” is displayed on the active line and the stop operation order is “middle right left”, regardless of the stop operation timing Any combination of symbols of “medium 1st2nd incorrect answers A1 to 9” is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the stop operation order is “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, the stop operation timing is a timing at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination of “upper bell 1” can be displayed on the effective line. Only when the combination of symbols of “upper bell 1” is displayed on the active line and the stop operation order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”, the stop operation timing is “right 1st incorrect answer”. Only when it is a timing at which a symbol constituting any combination of symbols A1 to 4 ”can be displayed on the effective line, any combination of symbols of the right 1st incorrect answer A1 to 4” is on the effective line. Is displayed.

  Here, the internal winning combination “middle left / right cross-up bell 1” (small pointer / replay data pointer value “17”), “middle left / right cross-up bell 2” (small role / replay data pointer value “ 18 ”),“ middle left and right cross-up bell 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 19 ”),“ middle left and right lower bell 1 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 29 ”) , “Middle left and right lower bell 2” (small role / replay data pointer value is “30”) and “middle right and left lower bell 3” (small role / replay data pointer value is “31”) Focusing on the operation sequence (see FIG. 19) is common in that it can provide similar benefits, and can be collectively referred to as “middle left and right bells”.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle left and right bell”, only when the stop operation order is “middle left and right”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “middle left and right bell”, the stop operation sequence “middle left and right” is the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous for the player.

  Also, the internal winning combination “middle right / left cross-up bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “20”) and “middle right / left cross-up bell 2” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “21”). ”),“ Middle right / left cross-up bell 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 22 ”),“ middle right / left lower bell 1 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 32 ”), “Middle right left lower bell 2” (small role / replay data pointer value is “33”) and “middle right left lower bell 3” (small role / replay data pointer value is “34”) Focusing on the order (see FIG. 19) is common in that it can provide similar benefits, and can be collectively referred to as “middle right left bell”.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle right left bell”, only when the stop operation order is “middle right left”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “middle right left bell”, the stop operation sequence “middle right left” is the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “Right / Left / Middle middle bell 1” (small pointer / replay data pointer value “23”), “Right / left middle middle bell 2” (small role / replay data pointer value “24”) , “Right left middle middle bell 3” (small role / replay data pointer value is “25”), “Right middle left bottom bell 1” (small role / replay data pointer value is “35”), “Right middle left” Lower bell 2 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 36 ”) and“ right / left middle lower bell 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 37 ”) 19), it can be collectively referred to as a “right / left middle bell” since it is common in that it can provide the same profit.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “Right / Left / Middle Bell”, only when the stop operation order is “Right / Left / Middle”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “Right / Left / Middle”, the stop operation sequence “Right / Left / Middle” is the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous to the player.

  Also, the internal winning combination “right middle left middle bell 1” (small pointer / replay data pointer value “26”), “right middle left middle bell 2” (small role / replay data pointer value “27”). ”),“ Right middle left middle bell 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 27 ”),“ Right middle left bottom bell 1 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 38 ”) , “Right middle left lower bell 2” (small role / replay data pointer value is “39”) and “Right middle left lower bell 3” (small role / replay data pointer value is “40”) When attention is paid to the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 19), it can be collectively referred to as “right middle left bell” because it is common in that similar profit can be given.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “right middle left bell”, only when the stop operation order is “right middle left”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. It is. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “right middle left bell”, the stop operation order “right middle left” is the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous to the player.

  Thus, based on the third element described above, the internal winning combination in which the player's profit fluctuates is referred to as a so-called “push order replay”, and when it is a replay combination, it is referred to as “push order replay”. In the case of a small combination, it may be referred to as “push order small combination”.

  In the present embodiment, during AT, “middle left / right bell”, “middle right / left bell”, “right / left middle bell” and “right middle / left bell” are determined as internal winning combinations during AT In addition, the stop operation sequence in which seven medals are paid out is notified.

<Composition of push order small role>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the structure of the push order small combination in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 20 (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a push order small combination in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a push order small combination in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the push order small part when not applying the structure of this.

  In FIG. 20A, “middle left and right bell A” conceptually means “middle left and right cross-up bells 1 to 3” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “17” to “19”). “Middle right / left bell A” conceptually represents “middle right / left cross-up bells 1 to 3” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “20” to “22”). “B” conceptually represents “middle bells 1 to 3 in the middle of the right and left” (the value of the data pointer for the small role / replay is “23” to “25”). Left middle bell 1 to 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer values are“ 26 ”to“ 28 ”),“ middle left and right bell C ”is“ middle left and right lower bell 1 to 3 ”( The small pointer / replay data pointer value conceptually represents “29” to “31”), and “middle right / left bell C” represents “middle “Right left lower bell 1 to 3” (small role / replay data pointer values are “32” to “34”), “Right left middle bell C” is “Right left middle lower bell 1 to 3” ( “Position / replay data pointer value is“ 35 ”to“ 37 ”” conceptually, “right middle left bell C” is “right middle left lower bell 1-3” (small role / replay data The pointer value conceptually represents “38” to “40”).

  Further, in FIG. 20A, “unquestioned one” means “middle left and right lower bells 1 to 3” (the values of the small role / replay data pointers are “29” to “31” as shown in FIG. 19). ”),“ Middle right and left lower bells 1 to 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer values are“ 32 ”to“ 34 ”),“ right left middle lower bells 1 to 3 ”(small role / replay data pointers The value is “35” to “37”) and “middle 1st2nd incorrect answer B1 to 9” in “middle right and left lower bells 1 to 3” (small pointer / replay data pointer values are “38” to “40”). And “Right 1st2nd Incorrect B1-6” are conceptually represented. In the same manner, “push order correct answer up to 7 sheets”, “push order correct answer middle stage of 7 sheets”, “push order correct answer lower stage of 7 sheets”, “pressed position correct answer upper stage of 7 sheets”, “pressed position correct answer of 1 sheet”, and “One first correct answer” also conceptually represents the winning combination shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 20 (b), “Right / Left / Middle Bell A” conceptually represents “Right / Left / Middle Cross-Up Bells 1 to 3” if it is defined as an internal winning combination. Only when the order is “middle right and left”, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the player wins one of “cross-up bells 1 to 9” and 7 medals are paid out. Also, if “Right / Middle / Left Bell A” is defined as an internal winning combination, “Right / Middle / Left Cross Up Bells 1-3” are conceptually represented. "", It represents that one of the "cross-up bells 1 to 9" is won and 7 medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. If “middle left / right bell B” is defined as an internal winning combination, it is a conceptual representation of “middle left / right middle bell 1-3”, and the stop operation order is “middle left / right”. In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the “middle bell” is won and 7 medals are paid out. If “middle right left bell B” is defined as an internal winning combination, “middle right left middle bell 1-3” is conceptually represented, and the stop operation order is “middle right left”. In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the “middle bell” is won and 7 medals are paid out.

  Also, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, “correction of the pressed position” means that the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, that is, “missing” occurs in the second element described above. This shows that the stop operation has been performed without any operation. For example, “upper right position of 7 pressed positions” means that when the stop operation order is “left middle right” or “middle left and right”, the stop operation timing is determined among “upper bells 1 to 12” ( The “upper bell” where the winning combination is permitted (winning is permitted) only when it is time to display the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the “upper bell” (winning is permitted) on the active line. "Is displayed on the active line and 7 medals are paid out.

  Further, in (a) and (b) of FIG. 20, “(1/4)” or “(1/2)” is a symbol on at least one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, when a stop operation is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing at which one predetermined symbol is displayed on the one reel, another predetermined operation that is not displayed at the predetermined stop operation timing is performed. When there are symbols, the number of those predetermined symbols (in other words, the number of selections when the player selects the stop operation timing) is shown.

  For example, when "upper bells 1 to 12" are viewed as one group, the reel 3L is arranged so that the "replay" symbol is displayed on the active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the reel 3R , “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, and “Watermelon C” symbols (one symbol group) are arranged to be displayed on the active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. On the other hand, in the reel 3C, “watermelon A” (corresponding to “upper bells 1 to 3”), “watermelon C (corresponding to“ upper bells 4 to 6 ”),“ white blank ”(“ upper bells 7 to 9 ”). ), “Red 7” (corresponding to “upper bells 10 to 12”) are the predetermined symbols described above, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation timing for displaying any of these symbols, the stop is performed. It is arranged so that other symbols are not displayed at the operation timing. That is, on the reel 3C, predetermined symbols are arranged so that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is 4 (see FIGS. 10, 14a and 14b).

  Further, for example, when “medium 1st incorrect answer A1 to A4” and “medium 1st incorrect answer B1 to B4” are considered as one group, in the reel 3L, “bell” and “watermelon B” symbols (one symbol group) ) Is displayed so as to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. In the reel 3C, the “cherry” symbol is displayed so as to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Yes. On the other hand, in the reel 3R, “BAR” (corresponding to “medium 1st incorrect answer A1, A3”), “watermelon A” (corresponding to “medium 1st incorrect answer A2, A4”), “watermelon B” (“medium 1st incorrect answer”). "Corresponding to incorrect answers B1, B3") and "red 7" (corresponding to "medium 1st incorrect answer B2, B4") are the predetermined symbols described above, and stop at the stop operation timing to display any of these symbols When an operation is performed, it is arranged so that other symbols are not displayed at the stop operation timing. That is, on the reel 3R, predetermined symbols are arranged so that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is two (see FIGS. 10, 14a, and 14b).

  Here, when comparing (a) and (b) of FIG. 20, in FIG. 20 (a), the number of internal winning combinations is eight, whereas in FIG. The number of winning combinations is 12, and the number of internal winning combinations is increased by four. Also, in FIG. 20A, when the desired lottery value of the push order small combination is set to “4000” (that is, when it is desired to assign lottery values of “1000” to the correct push order). ) Can be evenly assigned lottery values, whereas in FIG. 20B, the desired lottery values described above cannot be evenly assigned.

  As described above, according to the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment, the number of the internal winning combination is not made monotonous (the combination of displayed symbols) in the push order small combination. By reducing the number, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, reduce the control burden of the internal lottery processing, and even more easily assign the desired lottery values. It will also help.

  In FIG. 20A, lottery values (for example, “250”) of “middle left / right bell C”, “middle right / left bell C”, “right / left middle bell C”, and “right middle / left bell C” are used. , Instead of lowering the lottery value (for example, “750”) of “middle left / right bell A”, “middle right / left bell A”, “right / left middle bell B” and “right middle / left bell B”, Even if the stop operation sequence is incorrect due to any stop operation sequence when “C”, “middle right left bell C”, “right left center bell C” or “right middle left bell C” is won, ”Does not occur, and“ one unquestioned ”is won and one medal is paid out, whereas in FIG. 20B, the stop operation sequence of the first stop operation is incorrect. As long as there is, there is always the possibility of "missing".

  Thus, according to the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment, in the push order small combination that relatively lowers the lottery value, even if the stop operation order is incorrect, By giving the minimum profit to the player, as a result, the bias of the profit given to the player can be reduced, which contributes to the fairness of the game.

  The configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment has been described above with reference to FIG. 20, but the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, in the configuration of the push order small part according to the present embodiment, when the stop operation order is “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, there is no case where the push order is correct, but the push order It is good also as providing the case where it becomes a correct answer.

  In this case, “left middle right bell D” and “left and right middle bell D” are defined, and when “left middle right bell D” is won, only when the stop operation order is “left middle right”, Regardless of the timing, if any one of the “upper bells 1 to 12” wins and 7 medals are paid out, and the “left and right middle bell D” is won, the stop operation order is “right and left middle” In any case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, any one of “upper bells 1 to 12” may be won and seven medals may be paid out. Furthermore, “left middle right bell C” and “left and right middle bell C” are defined, and when “left middle right bell C” is won, the timing of the stop operation is limited only when the stop operation order is “left middle right”. Regardless of the case, if any of the “lower bells 1 to 3” is won and seven medals are paid out, and the “left and right middle bell C” is won, the stop operation sequence is “left and right middle”. As long as it is won, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, it will suffice to win one of the “lower bells 1 to 3” and pay out seven medals. Further, “one unquestioned sheet”, “one correct answer at pressing position”, and “one correct answer at first stop” may be configured in the same manner as described above.

  In addition, for example, “7” medals are paid out when the correct push order is answered, and “1” medals are issued when the push order is incorrect. The number of medals equal to or less than the prescribed number (15) may be paid out, and the number can be set as appropriate. Also, when the answer is incorrect, the number of medals that is one or more and less than the number of inserted medals (three) may be paid out, and the number can be set as appropriate. Further, when the push order is incorrect, the number of medals less than the number of medals paid out when the push order is correct may be paid out.

<Reel stop control>
The main CPU 51 executes the following processing in order to realize the above-described reel stop control.

  First, when an internal winning combination is determined in an internal lottery process (see S14 in FIG. 42) described later and information related to the internal winning combination is stored in the main RAM 53, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop initial setting process (see FIG. 42), various stop control information stored in the main ROM 52 is read out and stored in the main RAM 53 based on the internal winning combination.

  Here, as examples of information stored as various types of stop control information, in relation to the above-described second element, at which symbol position at which symbol position is operated at each symbol position in each reel, the symbol is stopped ( In relation to information that directly or indirectly defines the number of sliding pieces) and the third element described above, which symbol combination is preferentially displayed when the stop button is operated in any stop operation order For example, information that directly or indirectly defines the above.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stops each reel based on various types of stop control information stored in the main RAM 53 in a reel stop control process (see S22 in FIG. 42) described later. In particular, when the internal winning combination is “push order”, appropriate stop control information is selected from the stored stop control information according to the stop operation order, or one stop operation is performed. After that, stop control information is generated (changed) to perform stop control.

  Depending on the stop operation timing and stop operation order, different stop controls may be executed even for the same internal winning combination, but the stop control is uniquely determined in advance, and the same As long as the internal winning combination is the same stop operation timing and stop operation sequence, the same stop control is executed.

[Configuration of storage area allocated to main RAM]
Next, the configuration of various storage areas allocated to the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 21 is composed of 27 storage areas of internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 27. The internal winning combination storage area is configured to be able to store data (bits) according to the combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, and as a result of the internal lottery process, a winning is obtained. “1” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the permitted symbol combination, and “0” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the symbol combination that is not permitted to win.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 22 is composed of 27 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 27. The display combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area described above, and as a result of the internal lottery process, among the combinations of symbols that are allowed to win, symbols that can be displayed on the active line “1” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the combination, and “0” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. The display combination storage area is updated based on data (bits) stored in a symbol code storage area (to be described later) each time the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped. Even after all of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the symbol combination in which “1” is set becomes the winning combination. That is, the display combination storing area is used for the main CPU 51 to identify the winning combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 23 is composed of 27 storage areas, symbol code storage areas 1 to 27. The symbol code storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area described above, and is effective among the combinations of symbols defined in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. “1” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the line, and “0” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. Set. The symbol code storage area is updated each time the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

<Carry-over portion storage area>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 24 stores data related to the carryover combination. For example, when the BB carryover state is entered (that is, when “BB” is determined as the internal winning combination), bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area is set to “1”, and “BB” is won and BB is awarded. When shifting to the gaming state, the corresponding bit is reset to “0”.

<Game state flag storage area>
In the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 25, data relating to the BB gaming state, the RB gaming state, and the RT gaming state is stored. For example, when the BB gaming state is entered, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1”, and bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1”.

  Further, when the RT gaming state becomes the RT1 gaming state, bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1”, and when the RT gaming state becomes the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state flag storage area Bit 2 is reset to “0”.

  In the following description, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is also referred to as “BB gaming state flag”, bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is also referred to as “RB gaming state flag”, and bits of the gaming state flag storage area 2 is also referred to as “RT1 gaming state flag”.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 26 stores the states of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. Bit 0 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and “1” is stored in bit 0 when the stop button 17L is operated.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and “1” is stored in bit 1 when the stop button 17C is operated. Bit 2 corresponds to the stop button 17R, and “1” is stored in bit 2 when the stop button 17R is operated.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and “1” is stored in bit 4 when the stop button 17L is valid. Bit 5 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and “1” is stored in bit 5 when the stop button 17C is valid. Bit 6 corresponds to the stop button 17R. When the stop button 17R is valid, “1” is stored in bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, effective stop buttons refer to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R that correspond to the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and that can be detected by the main CPU 51 as a stop operation.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 27 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”, and other bits are set to “0”. Reset.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the pressing order “left → right → middle”, bit 2 corresponds to the pressing order “middle → left → right”, and bit 3 corresponds to the pressing order “middle → right → left”. Bit 4 corresponds to the pressing order “right → left → middle”, and bit 5 corresponds to the pressing order “right → middle → left”.

<Direction game state storage area>
The effect game state storage area shown in FIG. 28 is an area for storing the effect game state managed by the main control side (that is, the main CPU 51). Bit 0 corresponds to the effect gaming state “main CZ state 1”, and “1” is stored in bit 0 when the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1”.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the effect gaming state “main CZ state 2”, bit 2 corresponds to the effect gaming state “pseudo-probability change state 1”, and bit 3 represents the effect game state “pseudo-probability change state 2”. Bit 4 corresponds to the stage gaming state “AT state”. If any of the bits is “0”, the effect gaming state corresponds to the “normal gaming state”. The details of each effect game state will be described later.

[Configuration of various lottery tables used for production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 37, the structure of various lottery tables used for effects and the like will be described.

<Reel action lottery table for main CZ state>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a main CZ state reel action lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This reel action lottery table for the main CZ state is referred to in the normal game lottery process described later in the description of FIG. 48, and when the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2”, It is used to determine a reel action that is an effect based on the symbol variation mode displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the reel action lottery table for the main CZ state indicates whether the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (type of main CZ state) and the main CZ state. One of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined based on the value of the CZ game number counter indicating the number of staying games in the game and which internal winning combination is determined. As shown, lottery values are assigned.

  For example, when the production game state is “main CZ state 1”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “1”, and the internal winning combination is “replay”, reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 32768/65536. Reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 8192/65536, reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 23808/65536, reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 256/65536, and reel action 6 with a probability of 256/65536. And reel action 8 is determined with a probability of 256/65536.

  Further, for example, when the production gaming state is “main CZ state 1”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “8”, and the internal winning combination is “replay”, the reel action 2 has a probability of 65512/65536. The reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 512/65536, and the reel action 6 is determined with a probability of 512/65536.

  Further, for example, when the production game state is “main CZ state 2”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “1-7” or “8”, and the internal winning combination is “replay”, 52428/65536 The reel action 2 is determined with the probability of, the reel action 5 is determined with the probability of 6554/65536, and the reel action 6 is determined with the probability of 6554/65536.

  In addition, for example, reel action 1 is a pattern variation mode in which each reel starts reverse rotation (normal rotation) after one step reverse rotation, and reel action 2 is forward after each reel reversely rotates two steps. Reel action 3 is a symbol variation mode in which rotation (normal rotation) starts, and reel action 3 is a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts reverse rotation (normal rotation) after three stages reverse rotation, and reel action 4 This is a symbol variation mode in which the reels start to rotate forward (normal rotation) after four stages of reverse rotation, and the reel actions 5 and 7 start forward rotation (normal rotation) after each reel rotates reversely by five stages. It is a symbol variation mode, and the reel actions 6 and 8 can be a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts reverse rotation (normal rotation) after six reverse rotations. Reel actions 5 and 6 are different from each other in that the effects of the symbol variation mode are performed in the unit game, while the reel actions 7 and 8 are different in the effect of the symbol variation mode in the next unit game. It has become.

  In addition, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 51, when the effect game state is “main CZ state 1” and the reel action 3 or 4 is executed, the effect game state is changed from the next unit game to “main CZ state”. When the state transitions to “state 2” and the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” as described later in the description of FIG. 74, reel actions 5 to 8 are executed. The AT game is started from the next unit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the main CZ state, one reel action is determined and executed out of a plurality of reel actions having different reverse rotation stages. The player's sense of expectation when executed can be improved in stages, and the degree of advantage is synchronized with the number of stages of reverse rotation. The degree can be intuitively grasped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the value of the CZ game number counter is greater than that in the case where the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” and the value of the CZ game number counter is “1-7”. When “8” is “8”, the probability that the AT game is started (the probability that one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is determined) is relatively high. That is, since the number of continuing games in the CZ state is 8 (see FIG. 51), the final game is configured to be most advantageous to the player in the main CZ state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, the probability that the AT game is started (reel) when the production game state is “main CZ state 2” than when the production game state is “main CZ state 1”. The probability that any one of actions 5 to 8 is determined is relatively high. In other words, in the main CZ state, the player is more advantageous when the effect game state is “main CZ state 2” than when the effect game state is “main CZ state 1”. Has been.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the reel action 3 or 4 is executed in the main CZ state, the effect gaming state is shifted from the “main CZ state 1” to the “main CZ state 2”. In the “CZ state 2”, the probability that an AT game is started (probability that one of reel actions 5 to 8 is determined) is relatively high. In addition to improving the interest of the game, it is possible to prevent the expectation in the main CZ state from being lowered even when the reel action (reel action 5 to 8) at which the AT game is started is not determined. Can do.

  In FIG. 29 to FIG. 37, the internal winning combination “Replay” indicates “normal lip 1-4” and “bell lip 1-4”, and the internal winning combination “Bell” is “middle left / right cross-up bell 1”. ~ 3 "," Middle right / left cross-up bells 1-3 "," Right left middle middle bell 1-3 "," Right middle left middle bell 1-3 "," Middle right / left lower bell 1-3 "," Middle right left lower " "Bell 1-3", "Right left middle lower bell 1-3" and "Right middle left lower bell 1-3". Internal winning combination "chance role" is "chance lip 1", "chance lip 2" and “Strong Chance Lip” refers to “Watermelon” as the internal winning role refers to “Watermelon”, “Weak Cherry” as the internal winning role refers to “Weak Cherry”, and “Strong Cherry” as the internal winning role refers to “Strong Cherry” 1 ”and“ Strong Cherry 2 ”, but not limited to this. For example, reel action lottery may be performed for all or part of the internal winning combinations shown in FIGS. 17 and 18.

<Pseudo game number lottery table>
FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a pseudo game number random determination table stored in the main ROM 52. This pseudo game number lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during pseudo probability change state, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 1” or “pseudo probability change state 2”. Used to determine

  As shown in FIG. 30A, the pseudo game number lottery table is based on whether the stage game state is “pseudo probability change state 1” or “pseudo probability change state 2” (type of pseudo probability change state). The lottery value is assigned so that any one of the number of pseudo games of 0 to 10 is determined.

  For example, when the production game state is “pseudo-probability change state 1”, the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 164/256, the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 40/256, and 40/256 The number of times of pseudo game is determined by the probability, the number of times of pseudo game is determined by the probability of 6/256, and the number of times of pseudo game is determined by the probability of 6/256.

  Also, for example, when the production game state is “pseudo-probability change state 2”, the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 32/256, the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 64/256, and 64 / The number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 256, the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 64/256, the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 16/256, and the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 16/256. The number of games 10 is determined.

  If one or more times are determined as the number of pseudo games, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 74, a pseudo internal winning combination is determined, and the AT number is added (added) based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. Will be.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30, the probability that the number of pseudo games is given when the production game state is “pseudo-probability change state 2” than when the production game state is “pseudo-probability change state 1”. Is relatively high. That is, in the pseudo-probability change state, the player is more advantageous when the effect game state is “pseudo-probability change state 2” than when the effect game state is “pseudo-probability change state 1”. Has been.

<Pseudo internal winning combination lottery table>
FIG. 30B is a diagram showing a pseudo internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This pseudo internal winning combination lottery table is referred to in a lottery process during pseudo-probability changing state described later in the description of FIG. 47 and a game start lock execution process described later in description of FIG. ”Or“ pseudo-probability change state 2 ”, and when the number of pseudo games is 1 or more, it is used to determine a pseudo internal winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 30B, in the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table, a weak cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 128/256, and a strong cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 64/256. A lottery value is assigned so that a watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256, and a chance combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256.

  In addition, in the pseudo game executed while the game is locked at the start of the game, the pseudo internal winning combination is based on the player's operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R (pseudo stop operation). It is used to stop 3C and 3R. For example, when a weak cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the “cherry” symbol is pseudo-stopped on the lower stage of the left reel 3L, the lower stage of the middle reel 3C, and the upper stage of the right reel 3R. When a strong cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and the player performs a pseudo stop operation, the “cherry” symbol is pseudo-stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 3L, the lower stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. When a watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the "watermelon" symbol is pseudo-stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. When a chance combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, a “replay” symbol is suspected in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C. Is stopped, the symbol "cherry" is controlled to stop pseudo the middle of the right reel 3R. From this, it can be said that the pseudo internal winning combination is a reel action.

<Highly accurate lottery table>
(C) of FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a highly accurate transition lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This high-probability transition lottery table is referred to in a lottery process during pseudo-probability changing state, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the stage gaming state is “pseudo-probability changing state 1”, is the transition to “pseudo-probability changing state 2”? Used to determine whether or not.

  As shown in (c) of FIG. 30, when the internal winning combination is “replay”, the high probability transition lottery table maintains the current state with a probability of 255/256 (that is, does not shift to “pseudo-probability change state 2”). ) Is determined and a probability of 256/256 is determined when a high-accuracy transition (ie, transition to “pseudo-probability change state 2”) is determined with a probability of 1/256 and the internal winning combination is “watermelon” A lottery value is assigned so that a high-accuracy transition (that is, transition to the “pseudo-probability change state 2”) is determined (that is, a probability of 100%).

<Highly secure obstacle game number lottery table>
(D) of FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a highly secured obstacle game number lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This highly secured obstacle number-of-game lottery table is referred to in a lottery process during pseudo-probability changing state, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect gaming state shifts to “pseudo-probability changing state 2”, Used to determine the number of unit games that can play a pseudo game (that is, the number of times a lock is executed during the “pseudo-probability change state 2” in the game start lock execution process described later in the description of FIG. 49). It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 30D, in the highly secured obstacle game number lottery table, the number of highly secured obstacle games is determined 3 times with a probability of 164/256, and the number of highly secured obstacle games is 4 times with a probability of 60/256. The lottery value is assigned so that the number of high-security games is determined 5 times with a probability of 24/256, and the number of high-security games 10 is determined with a probability of 8/256.

<Pseudo-probability state end lottery table>
FIG. 30E is a diagram illustrating a pseudo probability variation state end lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. This pseudo-probability change state end lottery table is referred to in the pseudo-probability change state process described later in the description of FIG. 71, and is a case where the effect gaming state is “pseudo-probability change state 1”. This is used to determine whether or not to end the pseudo-probability change state when the value of the pseudo-probability change state management counter that is the number of guaranteed games in the “probability change state 1” is “0”.

  As shown in (e) of FIG. 30, the pseudo-probability change state end lottery table ends the probability change with a probability of 8192/32768 (ie, “pseudo-probability change state 1”) when the internal winning combination is “replay”. ) Is determined, the probability of 24576/32768 is determined to continue (ie, “pseudo-probability state 1” is not terminated), and the internal winning combination is “bell”, the probability of 24576/32768 Is determined to end the probability change (ie, to end “pseudo-probability change state 1”), and to determine the continuation of the probability change (ie, not to end “pseudo-probability change state 1”) with a probability of 8192/32768. A value has been assigned.

  As will be described later in the description of FIG. 52, the “pseudo-probability change state 1” actually ends based on winning the “bell lip”, but in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 When the above-described probability change end is determined, the stop operation sequence in which “bell lip” becomes a winning combination when either “normal lip 1 to 4” or “bell lip 1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination ( (See FIG. 19), “Bellip” is awarded and “Pseudo Probability Change State 1” is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the pseudo-probability change state management counter is not “0”, when the sub CPU 81 determines the above-described probability change continuation, either “normal lip 1 to 4” or “bell lip 1 to 4” is an internal winning combination. In this case, the stop operation order (see FIG. 19) in which “Bellip” does not become a winning combination is informed so that “Belllip” is not won and “Pseudo Probability State 1” is continued. Yes.

  However, the end and continuation of the “pseudo-probability change state 1” may be managed by the main CPU 51 as in the “pseudo-probability change state 2”. Specifically, the main CPU 51 manages the pseudo-probability change state management counter, and based on the fact that the value of the pseudo-probability change state management counter becomes “0”, the effect gaming state is changed from “pseudo-probability change state 1” to “AT in progress”. It is only necessary to shift to “state”.

<Reel action lottery table for finalists>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a fixed-action reel action lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This fixed action reel action lottery table is referred to in the normal game lottery process described later in the description of FIG. 48, and is displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R when the internal winning combination is “final winning combination”. This is used to determine a special reel action that is an effect based on the symbol variation mode. The “determined combination” means a combination for determining that the AT game is started. In the present embodiment, “cherry lip”, “strong cherry lip”, and “strong bell” (see FIG. 17). ).

  As shown in FIG. 31, the reel action lottery table for finalized combinations is such that one of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined based on which final winning combination is the internal winning combination. A lottery value is assigned.

  When the internal winning combination is “Cherry Lip”, the special reel action 1 is determined with a probability of 128/256, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 43/256, and the special reel action 3 with a probability of 42/256. The special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 43/256.

  When the internal winning combination is “strong cherry lip”, the special reel action 1 is not determined, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 85/256, and the special reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 86/256. The special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 85/256.

  When the internal winning combination is “strong bell”, the special reel actions 1 and 3 are not determined, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 128/256, and the special reel action 4 is performed with a probability of 128/256. It is determined.

  Further, for example, the special reel action 1 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are reversely rotated in order, and the right reel 3R is not reversely rotated and starts normal rotation (normal rotation). The reel action 2 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are reversely rotated in this order, and then forward rotation (normal rotation) is started. The special reel action 3 is the left reel 3L. This is a symbol variation mode in which the center reel 3C and the right reel 3R are reversely rotated in this order, and after that, all the reels are further reversely rotated once and then forward rotation (normal rotation) is started. This is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are reversely rotated in this order, and then the forward rotation (normal rotation) is started after the reels are further rotated twice in reverse. It can be a thing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 31 and described later in the description of FIG. 74, when the special reel action 1 is determined, the addition fails, and the AT number (the value of the AT management difference number counter) is not added. When the special reel actions 2 to 4 are determined, the addition is successful, and the number of ATs corresponding to the type of the special reel action is added. Specifically, when the special reel action 2 is determined, “300” is added to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter, and when the special reel action 3 is determined, the AT management difference sheet number. When “400” is added to the counter value and the special reel action 4 is determined, “500” is added to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter.

  In the present embodiment, the “cherry” symbol is displayed for the left reel 3L regardless of whether the internal winning combination is “cherry lip” or the internal winning combination is “strong cherry lip”. When the stop button 17L is operated at the stop operation timing to be performed, the “cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 3L, and stop control for winning “cherry lip A” is performed. On the other hand, the right reel 3R is configured such that the stop control is different between the case where the internal winning combination is “cherry lip” and the case where the internal winning combination is “strong cherry lip”.

  Specifically, for example, when the “BAR” symbol is pressed in each reel, and the internal winning combination is “strong cherry lip”, if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop operation timing, Each reel is stopped and displayed at the position of symbol position data “12” in the middle of the left reel 3L, the position of symbol position data “10” in the middle of the middle reel 3C, and the position of symbol position data “13” in the middle of the right reel 3R. However, when the internal winning combination is “cherry lip”, even if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop operation timing, the symbol position data is displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 3L. Although it is possible to stop display at the position of “12” and the position of symbol position data “10” at the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, the middle stage of the right reel 3R stops at the position of symbol position data “13”. And it is configured so that it can not be displayed.

  Here, when the internal winning combination is “strong cherry lip”, as described above, since the special reel actions 2 to 4 are always determined, the addition success is confirmed, whereas the internal winning combination is “ In the case of “Cherry Lip”, since the special reel action 1 may be determined as described above, the success or failure of the addition has a probability of ½. Whether it is “strong cherry lip” or “cherry lip” is an event of great interest to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the “BAR” symbol is pressed for at least each reel, the internal winning combination is changed to “strong cherry” by changing the stop mode of the symbol stopped and displayed on each reel. “Rep” or “Cherry Rip” can be recognized before the special reel action is executed. With this configuration, a player who wants to quickly recognize the type of the final winning combination recognizes the type before the special reel action is executed by pressing the “BAR” symbol on each reel. Will be able to. On the other hand, a player who wants to recognize whether or not the special reel action is successful will be able to play a game with a further expectation by not performing the above-mentioned push. That is, since it is possible to notify whether or not the addition is successful depending on the notification form and timing desired by the player, it is possible to perform notification according to the player's preference regarding the notification of the addition.

<Mode suggestion lottery table>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a mode suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub-ROM 82. This mode suggestion effect lottery table is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the description of FIG. 72, and is used to determine the mode suggestion effect for suggesting the determined mode in the first game after the end of the AT game. Used for.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the mode suggestion effect lottery table, the lottery value is set so that one of the mode suggestion effects 1 to 9 is determined based on which mode the current mode is. Assigned.

  When the current mode is “mode A”, mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 6552/32768, mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and mode suggestion effect 3 with a probability of 6554/32768. Is determined, mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768.

  When the current mode is “mode B”, mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 7476/32768, mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and mode suggestion with a probability of 6554/32768. Effect 3 is determined, mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 3276/32768, and mode suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 3276/32768. The mode suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, and the mode suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 512/32768.

  When the current mode is “mode C”, mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 9728/32768, mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 8192/32768, and mode suggestion is with a probability of 4096/32768. Effect 3 is determined, mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, and mode suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768. The mode suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, the mode suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 1024/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 9 is determined with a probability of 512/32768.

  Here, the mode is used to determine the next number of ceiling games, as will be described later in the description of FIG. Mode A is the most unfavorable mode for the player, and the probability that 1000 games are selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than mode B. In addition, mode B is an advantageous mode over mode A, and the probability that 240 games are selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than mode A. Mode C is the most advantageous mode for the player, and the number of ceiling games is always selected within 100 games.

  That is, when the mode suggestion effects 6 to 8 are determined, it is determined that the current mode is mode B or mode C. When the mode suggestion effect 9 is determined, the current mode is determined. Is determined to be mode C, the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  Further, since the mode suggestion effect is performed in the first game after the end of the AT game, it is possible to reduce a decrease in gaming motivation due to the end of the AT game.

<Number of remaining games suggestion lottery table>
FIG. 33 is a view showing a remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. As shown in FIG. This remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the description of FIG. 72, and the number of remaining games until the AT game is started (that is, the ceiling game) for every 10 games in the normal game. This is used to determine the remaining game number suggestion effect for suggesting the number of games up to the number).

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table, the remaining game number suggestion effect of any one of the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 10 is based on the range of the current remaining game number. A lottery value is assigned as determined.

  For example, when the current remaining game number is “11-30” game, the remaining game number suggesting effect 1 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, and the remaining game number suggesting effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, The remaining game number suggesting effect 4 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the remaining game number suggesting effect 5 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, and the remaining game number suggesting effect 6 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. The remaining game number suggesting effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, the remaining game number suggesting effect 8 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, the remaining game number suggesting effect 9 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and 9300/32768 The remaining game number suggesting effect 10 is determined by the probability.

  Further, for example, when the current remaining game number is “31-50”, the remaining game number suggesting effect 2 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, and the remaining game number suggesting effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. The remaining game number suggesting effect 4 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, the remaining game number suggesting effect 5 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, and the remaining game number suggesting effect 6 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, The remaining game number suggesting effect 7 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the remaining game number suggesting effect 8 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, the remaining game number suggesting effect 9 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and 9300 / The remaining game number suggestion effect 10 is determined with a probability of 32768.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 33, when the remaining game number suggestion effect 1 is determined and executed, the remaining game number is “1-10” game or “11-30” game (that is, remaining 30). When the remaining game number suggestion effect 2 is determined and executed, the remaining game number is “31-50”, “51-100” or “101-240” ( That is, if the remaining game number suggestion effect 3 is determined and executed, the remaining game number is “1-10”, “11-30”. When “31 to 50”, “51 to 100” or “101 to 240” (that is, within the remaining 240 games) is confirmed, when the remaining game number suggesting effects 1 to 3 are executed, The number of games remaining for the player Less it (ie, the start of the next AT game to be close) can be directly recognized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33, when any of the remaining game number suggesting effects 8 to 10 is determined and executed, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of remaining games.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the probability that a specific remaining game number suggesting effect is executed in a certain remaining game number range is set to a specific remaining game number suggesting effect in another remaining game number range. As the number of remaining games decreases by making it higher or lower than the probability of being executed, a specific remaining game number suggesting effect is executed multiple times, It is supposed to add a new gameability that makes the number of remaining games guessed.

  A specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of estimating the number of remaining games by the remaining game number suggestion effect in the pachislot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  For example, the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is executed with a probability of 2000/32768 when the current remaining game number is in the range of “31-50” or “101-240”, and the current remaining game number is “ When it is in the range of 241 to ”, it is executed with a probability of 300/32768, and when it is in the range of the remaining number of games, it is executed with a probability of 100/32768. When executed, it can be estimated that the remaining number of games is likely to be in the range of “31-50” or “101-240”, but on the other hand, it may be in the range of “241”. Can be guessed.

  In this case, if none of the remaining game number suggestion effects 4 to 7 is executed at the subsequent execution of the remaining game number suggestion effects, the remaining game number may still be in the range of “241 to”. Can be estimated. On the other hand, when any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 4 to 7 is executed, as shown in FIG. 34, the range of the remaining game number is narrowed down according to the type of the remaining game number suggestion effect. It becomes possible to guess. When any of the remaining game number suggesting effects 1 to 3 is executed, it is possible to definitely recognize that the remaining game number is small as described above.

  In this way, in this embodiment, the number of remaining games until the game can be transferred to the AT game is obtained by executing the remaining game number suggesting effect every time 10 games are played in the normal game. It is possible to add a new playability of guessing. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved and the decrease in the operation of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of games in the normal game increases, more remaining game number suggesting effects are executed. Therefore, a player with a larger number of games more accurately counts the number of remaining games. Therefore, it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in estimating the number of remaining games until the game can be transferred to AT games, there may be cases where it can be estimated by executing the remaining game number suggestion effect, or a plurality of remaining games. Since it may be estimated by the execution of the number suggestion effect, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the remaining game number suggestion effect itself.

  In this embodiment, since the determination of the remaining game number suggestion effect is performed with the lottery probability as described above, it is monotonous in estimating the remaining number of games until the game can be transferred to the AT game. Can be prevented, and more playability can be achieved.

  In addition, it is desirable that the production data related to the remaining game number suggesting productions 4 to 7 is production data having some relationship with each other. For example, the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is effect data displayed as “close?”, And the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is displayed as “should be close ...”. The effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is the effect data displayed as “It should be soon!”, And the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 7 is “immediately close”. It can be effect data displayed as “!”.

  Further, for example, the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is effect data displayed as “Where is the character A?”, And the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is “location a or place The effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is the effect data displayed as “Let's search for a location a!”, and the remaining game number suggestion is displayed. The effect data related to the effect 7 may be effect data displayed as “Let's search for the location b!”.

<AT point addition lottery table>
FIG. 35 is a view showing the AT point addition lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. As shown in FIG. This AT point addition lottery table is referred to in the start command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 69, and when any of “Bellips 1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during the AT game, This is used to determine whether or not cumulative points are added during AT.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the AT point addition lottery table, either maintenance (non-winning) or addition (winning) is determined based on the current point value (that is, the current AT point counter value). A lottery value is assigned as shown.

  When the current point value is “0”, maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 26214/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 6554/32768. When the current point value is “1”, maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 27646/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 5120/32768.

  When the current point value is “2”, maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768. When the current point value is “3”, maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768.

<Additional lottery table for AT count during addition>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an AT number addition lottery table during the added state stored in the sub-ROM 82. This added state AT number addition lottery table is referred to in the added state processing described later in the description of FIG. 70, and the added state point counter value described later becomes “100” or more during the added state. This is used to determine an AT number addition value which is a value added to the AT management difference sheet counter.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the added state AT number addition lottery table, the AT number added value is determined based on the added state management counter value indicating the number of staying games in the added state. A lottery value is assigned to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the AT number addition lottery from becoming monotonous in the added state, and maintain the interest of the game even when repeatedly controlled to the added state.

  For example, when the added state management counter value is “9” (the added state is the first game excluding when the added state is introduced), the number of AT differences is 50 sheets as the AT number addition value with a probability of 29492/32768 (AT management difference) “50” is added to the number counter), and the difference number of 100 sheets (adding “100” to the AT management difference number counter) is determined as the AT number addition value with a probability of 3276/32768.

  Also, for example, when the added state management counter value is “5” (the added state is the fifth game excluding when the added state is introduced), the number of difference 20 pieces (AT management) as the AT number addition value with a probability of 20276/32768 "20" is added to the difference number counter for use), and 30 pieces of difference number (adding "30" to the difference number counter for AT management) is decided as the AT number addition value with a probability of 8192/32768. , 3276/32768 are determined as the AT number addition value for 50 difference sheets (adding “50” to the AT management difference sheet counter), and the number of difference sheets is 100 as the AT number addition value with a probability of 1024/32768. The number of sheets (adding “100” to the AT management difference sheet counter) is determined.

  Also, for example, when the added state management counter value is “0” (the tenth game in the added state excluding the time when the added state is introduced), the difference number of 30 sheets (AT management) as an added value of the AT number with a probability of 24166/32768 "30" is added to the difference number counter for use) and 50 pieces of difference number (adding "50" to the difference number counter for AT management) is determined as the AT number addition value with a probability of 6554/32768. , 2048/32768 are determined as the AT number addition value for 100 difference sheets (adding “100” to the AT management difference sheet counter).

  In this embodiment, difference number management is adopted as a method for managing the number of ATs. Here, the difference number management means that when a medal is paid out by winning one of the small roles in the unit game, the medal inserted in the unit game from the payout number (for example, 7). A value (for example, 7-3 = 4) obtained by subtracting the number of inserted sheets (for example, 3 sheets) is subtracted from the difference sheet counter (for example, AT management difference sheet counter), and the difference is obtained. The AT game is ended when the value of the number counter becomes 0 or less.

  However, in the present embodiment, the AT management method is not limited to the above-described difference number management. For example, a game number management method for managing the number of games in which AT games are performed, and a push order Any of the number-of-reports management method for managing the number of times of notification, the number-of-sets management method for managing a predetermined number of games as one set, the method of continuation rate management for managing the continuation rate of AT games, or their Combinations can also be employed. That is, in the case of “addition” of “AT number”, in addition to adding the difference number to the difference number counter, the number of games in which AT games are played is added, and the number of times the push order is notified is added, It is assumed that either the number of sets is added, the continuation rate is reset, the continuation rate is set high, or a combination thereof.

<Point addition lottery table during extra state>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a point addition lottery table during the added state stored in the sub-ROM 82. This added point addition lottery table is referred to in the added state process described later in the description of FIG. 70, and determines a point added value that is a value added to the point counter during each added game and the added state. Used for. In the added state point counter, when the added point value is cumulatively added during the added state, and the value of the added point counter becomes “100” or more, the above-described AT number is added and the added state is added again. Can be done from the beginning (continue).

  As shown in FIG. 37, the point addition lottery table during the added state is such that one of the point addition values 1 to 100 is determined based on which internal winning combination is determined. A value has been assigned.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “replay”, one of the point addition values 1 to 5 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, and one of the point addition values 6 to 10 is determined with a probability of 1024/32768. , 819/32768 is determined to determine one of the point addition values 11 to 15, 163/32768 is determined to be one of the point addition values 16 to 20, and 81/32768 is determined to be the point addition value 21 to 21. 32 is determined, one of the point addition values 34 to 36 is determined with a probability of 8/32768, one of the point addition values 72 to 76 is determined with a probability of 2/32768, and 1/32768 Any of the point addition values 78 to 100 is determined by the probability. In addition, although description is abbreviate | omitted about the point addition values 37-72, it is assumed that any lottery value including 0 is assigned.

  In addition, as the added state, a first added state and a second added state are further provided. In the first added state, lottery of the point addition value is performed using the point addition lottery table during the added state shown in FIG. In the added state, the point addition value lottery may be performed using the point addition lottery table during the added state with different lottery values. In this case, in the added state point addition lottery table used in the second added state, the lottery value is assigned such that the point added value given is higher than that in the added state point added lottery table shown in FIG. In addition, in the point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 37, a lottery value of “1” or more may be assigned to the point addition values 33 and 77 to which the lottery value “0” is assigned. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the type of the added state by determining a predetermined point addition value.

[Configuration of various data used for reel production control]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the structure of various data used for reel effect control will be described.

<Reel production selection data>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of reel effect selection data stored in the main ROM 52. As shown in FIG. This reel effect selection data is data used to control the effect according to the symbol variation mode corresponding to the determined reel action in the reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the reel production selection data, the production frequency and excitation output selection data or production phase end data are associated with each production reel.

  The number of effects is data that defines the number of times the excitation output control is executed based on the associated excitation output table for the effects or the symbol position adjustment data. For example, when “32” is associated with the number of effects and “excitation output table for reverse rotation” is associated with the excitation output table for effects, the end code starts from the head address of the “reverse excitation output table” (see FIG. 39). The excitation output control up to this time is defined as one time, and it is defined that it is executed 32 times.

  The excitation output selection data is data for selecting the type of the effect excitation output table or the type of symbol position adjustment data. Actually, in the excitation output selection data, a data address indicating the location of the effect excitation output table or a data address indicating the location of the symbol position adjustment data is stored, and the effect excitation is based on the data address. The output table or the symbol position adjustment data is read out. For convenience, in FIG. 38, each table or data is directly stored.

  The effect phase end data is data for identifying the end of the reel effect (effect based on the symbol variation mode) in the effect target reel. For example, when the reel effect selection data is “1” and the effect target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), when the excitation main force control is executed 10 times by the hold excitation output table, the left reel 3L When the reel effect (the effect due to the pattern variation mode) ends, the reel effect selection data is “2” and the effect target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), the acceleration output excitation output table After the excitation output control is executed once, the excitation output control using the symbol position adjustment data 2 is further executed 84 times, and then the reel effect for the left reel 3L (the effect due to the symbol variation mode) is finished. The

  In this way, for each production target reel (reel 3L, 3C, 3R), the number of productions, selection data for excitation output, and production phase end data are individually stored, so that various reel productions (production by design variation mode). ) Can be executed.

<Excitation output table for production>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect excitation output table stored in the main ROM 52. This effect excitation output table is based on the excitation output selection data in the reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG. 59 or the result of the reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. Used to output excitation data to the stepping motor.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the excitation output table for effect is associated with excitation direction data and an effect excitation timer, or an end code.

  The excitation direction data is data that defines the rotation direction of the reel (that is, the output order of pulses to the excitation phase in each stepping motor). For example, when the excitation phase of the stepping motor is A to D (four phases), the excitation direction data “forward rotation” is the order of AB phase, BC phase, CD phase, and DA phase. Is the data that is controlled so that the reel rotates forward (from the viewpoint of the player, rotating from top to bottom) by outputting the excitation data at, and the excitation direction data “reverse rotation” By outputting excitation data in the order of DC phase, DC phase, C-B phase, and B-A phase, the reel is controlled to rotate backward (from the viewpoint of the player, rotating from the bottom to the top). Excitation direction data “Hold” is controlled so that the reel remains stopped by exciting all of the A to D phases, or none of the A to D phases. It is data.

  The effect excitation timer defines the timer value to be decremented by one in a timer update process (see S322 in FIG. 55), which will be described later, and the end code indicates the excitation data in the excitation output table. Data for identifying the end of output.

  That is, for example, when the “reverse rotation excitation output table” is set as the production excitation output table, first, after outputting the excitation data for rotating the reel in reverse for the number of interruptions of two times, Excitation data for reverse rotation of the reel is output by the number of interruptions twice, and the control is terminated.

<Directional design position search data>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of effect symbol position search data stored in the main ROM 52. This effect symbol position search data is a symbol position at the time of starting or ending excitation output control in the reel effect (effect based on the symbol variation mode) in the reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61. This is data used to search whether or not the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the effect symbol position search data, the number of searches and the effect symbol position search data are associated with each effect target reel in accordance with the type of reel action.

  The reel actions 1 to 8 are as described above, and the reel action 9 is a reel action that is executed when the staged gaming state shifts to the “pseudo-probable change state 1” in the “AT state”. Is a reel action that is executed when the production gaming state shifts to the “pseudo-probability changing state 2” in the “AT state”. The reel action 11 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination “weak cherry”, the reel action 12 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination “strong cherry”, and the reel action 13 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination “watermelon”. The reel action 14 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination “chance combination”.

  The reel action 9 is finally a reel action in which each reel has “red 7” symbols in the middle, and the reel action 10 finally has “red 7” symbols in the right upward direction on each reel. The reel action 11 is a reel action in which the “cherry” symbol is finally displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C and the upper stage of the right reel 3R. Finally, each reel has a reel action with “cherry” symbols on the bottom, and reel action 13 finally has a reel action with “watermelon” symbols on the right. The action 14 finally displays the “replay” symbol in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. "Cherry" symbols and has a reel action that is displayed in the middle.

  The number of searches is data that defines the number of times of searching for the effect symbol position in the reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61. In other words, the appropriate number as the effect symbol position in the effect target reel. This is data indicating the number of various symbol positions. For example, when the reel action is “9” and the production target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), the left reel 3L has one symbol position for displaying the “red 7” symbol in the middle (design) Since the position data is only 2), the number of searches is “1”, but when the reel action is “12” and the production target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), the left reel 3L The number of searches is “2” because there are two symbol positions (the symbol position data 13 and 18) for displaying the “cherry” symbol in the lower row.

  In other words, when the symbol position adjustment data is in the middle of the reel effect selection data, the effect symbol position search data is the symbol position when starting the excitation output control in the subsequent reel effect (effect depending on the symbol variation mode). , When the design symbol position is used for searching whether or not the design symbol position is an appropriate symbol position, and the symbol position adjustment data is at the end of the reel production selection data (more precisely, before the production phase end data) Is used to search whether or not the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position as the symbol position when the excitation output control in the reel effect (the effect due to the symbol variation mode) is terminated.

[Pachislot machine game flow]
Next, the flow of the game of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram showing a game flow in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, an AT game that is an advantageous game state advantageous to the player and a normal game that is relatively disadvantageous compared to the AT game as a state in which the player plays a game. It is roughly divided into normal games that are in a state.

<Normal game>
The transition from the normal game to the AT game is that the number of games after the end of the AT game has reached the above-mentioned number of ceiling games (the number of ceiling games is exhausted), that the above-mentioned finalized role is won (the finalized role win), This is performed when the reel actions 5 to 8 are determined in the main CZ state (successful CZ).

  Here, when shifting from a normal game to an AT game by a winning combination, first, based on the fact that the winning combination is won, a basic continuation number of AT games is given (150 is added to the AT management difference counter). ) After that, as described above, the reel action (special reel actions 1 to 4) is determined according to the type of the determined combination, and the number of additional AT game continuations according to the determined reel action is given (AT management difference number) 300, 400, or 500 is added to the counter).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning of the winning combination is not limited to merely generating an AT game, but the reel action to be executed in the next game is determined based on the winning of the winning combination, In the case where the determined reel action is a specific reel action (special reel actions 2 to 4), the number of continuations of the AT game is increased based on the execution of the specific reel action. The expectation can be improved not only in the game won or won in the winning combination but also in the next game.

  In the present embodiment, the basic continuation number is given based on the winning of the decisive combination, and the additional continuation number is given according to the determined reel action. However, the application mode is not limited to this. For example, when the special reel action 1 is determined, the first continuous number of times is given as the basic continuous number of times (150 is added to the AT management difference counter), and when the special reel action 2 is determined, the basic number of continuous times is determined. Is given (add 300 to the AT management difference sheet counter), and when the special reel action 3 is determined, the third continuation number is given as the basic continuation number (AT management difference sheet counter). If the special reel action 4 is determined, the fourth continuation number may be given as the basic continuation number (500 is added to the AT management difference number counter). In this case, if the number of basic continuations given by the notification means is notified at the time of execution or termination of the special reel action, not only in the game that won the winning combination or won, but also in the next game Expectation can be improved. In this case, as the number of additional continuations, a right to continue the AT game again after the end of the AT game (that is, a right to continue the AT game for one set) may be given. Furthermore, the number of rights to continue this AT game may be determined by lottery.

  Further, the reel action based on the winning combination of the winning combination may be executed not only during the normal game but also during the AT game. In this case, the basic continuation number described above is the basic additional number of times, and the additional continuation number described above is the additional additional number of times, which is given to the player.

(Main CZ state)
Further, in the normal game, “strong chance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and when either of “special lip A1-6” or “special lip B” is won (strong chance lip is established), the main CPU 51 controls The effect gaming state shifts from the “normal gaming state” to the “main CZ state 1” and becomes the main CZ state for 8 games. Then, when the production game state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” to be subsequently shifted, a specific reel action (any of reel actions 5 to 8) is determined and executed. The CZ will be successful, and the normal game will shift to the AT game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the chance zone state (main CZ state), which is a state in which it is easy to shift to the AT game, is derived by the control of the main CPU 51, and in this main CZ state, a plurality of reel actions ( Since a specific reel action (one of reel actions 5 to 8) is determined and executed when the reel actions 1 to 8) are executed, only the lock is executed. Compared to the case, the expectation in the chance zone state can be significantly improved.

  The transition to the main CZ state may be executed not only during the normal game but also during the AT game. In this case, based on the fact that a specific reel action (one of reel actions 5 to 8) is determined and executed out of a plurality of reel actions (reel actions 1 to 8), the predetermined number of ATs is determined by the player. It should just be given to. Further, the number of ATs to be given may be changed according to the type of a specific reel action (any of reel actions 5 to 8).

<AT game>
When the game shifts to AT game, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified until the value of the AT management difference counter becomes 0 or less (digests the number of AT), and the stop is performed according to the notification. By performing the operation, the player can increase medals.

  In addition, in AT games, when any of “Bellips 1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, if an AT lottery addition lottery is won, the AT points are cumulatively added. When four AT points are added (the value of the AT point counter is 4), the AT game is continued even if the number of ATs is exhausted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, two types of states, that is, an added state and a pseudo-probability change state, in which the number of ATs (the value of the AT management difference number counter) can be added during an AT game are provided. .

(Additional state)
In the AT game, when “BAR lip 1” or “BAR lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, and the first stop operation is performed for the parts other than the left reel 3L, the sub CPU 81 It shifts to an added state by control of. This additional state continues for 12 games per set, and in the first game (the value of the added state management counter is 11) and the second game (the value of the added state management counter is 10), when the added state is introduced. The extra lottery is executed, and in the third to twelfth game (the extra state management counter value is 9 to 0), the extra lottery point lottery is executed. When the value of the point counter during the added state becomes “100” or more, the value is added according to how many games in the added state the value of the point counter during the added state becomes “100” or more. The number of ATs (the value of the AT management difference sheet counter) is determined, and the addition state can be performed again from the beginning (setting continues).

  In addition, in the added state, the value of the AT management difference counter is not subtracted even if a small combination is won, and the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous to the player is notified for the push order small combination. Therefore, if the added state itself continues, the number of ATs will be increased and the number of medals will increase.

  In addition, in the added state, the predetermined number that is the value of the point counter in the added state for continuing the added state is set to “100”, and points in the added state that exceed the predetermined number “100” are determined. If acquired, the surplus will be carried over to the next addition state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific start condition is satisfied during the AT game (for example, “BAR lip 1” or “BAR lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, except for the left reel 3L). When the first stop operation is performed, any winning replay is won and the added state is digested for two games), and a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining ten games are digested or added) The above-described addition state is controlled until the above is determined. This extra state functions as a state where the number of ATs is increased and also functions as a state where the number of medals is increased. Therefore, even if the number of ATs cannot be increased, By reliably enjoying the benefits of increase, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, when the added state continues, the points in the added state that are cumulatively added during the added state can be carried over, so that the lottery result of the points in the added state is not wasted, and in the added state The expectation of lottery can be further improved.

  Note that the transition to the added state may be executed not only during an AT game but also during a normal game. In this case, it is only necessary to shift to the AT game based on the value of the point counter in the added state being “100” or more. Further, the number of ATs to be initially given may be changed according to how many games in the added state the value of the point counter in the added state becomes “100” or more.

(Pseudo-probability state)
In the AT game, when any one of “bell lip 1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination and a winning lottery in the pseudo-probability changing state is won, a specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed, and the main CPU 51 It shifts to the pseudo-probability change state by the control of. In this pseudo-probability change state, the number of pseudo games when the game start lock is executed once is determined, and the determined number of pseudo games can be performed. When determining the number of pseudo games, a plurality of times of pseudo games can be determined.

  Here, the pseudo game includes an operation to the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) locked at the start of the game (pseudo-injection operation), an operation to the start lever (start lever 16) (pseudo-start operation), The determination of the pseudo internal winning combination and the operation of the stop buttons (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) (pseudo stop operation) are performed, so that the progress is controlled. Impress the player as if they are progressing. In the present embodiment, the determination of the pseudo internal winning combination is performed based on the pseudo start operation in the same manner as the determination of the internal winning combination in the normal game, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed based on a pseudo throwing operation or a pseudo stop operation (particularly, a pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation). In addition, the pseudo throwing operation, the pseudo start operation, and the pseudo stop operation are collectively referred to as “pseudo game operation”. Also, for convenience of explanation, an operation to a bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) in a normal game (normal insertion operation), an operation to a start lever (start lever 16) in a normal game (normal start operation), normal The operations (normal stop operation) to stop buttons (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) in the game are collectively referred to as “normal game operation”.

  Then, in the pseudo-probability change state, the number of ATs (the value of the AT management difference sheet counter) is lottered based on the determined internal winning combination, and the AT number (based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination ( An addition lottery is performed (the value of the AT management difference sheet counter).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the pseudo-probability change state, not only the chance of adding the number of ATs based on the internal winning combination but also the opportunity of adding the number of ATs based on the pseudo internal winning combination is given. Therefore, it is possible to expect a lottery extra lottery during one unit game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the addition. In addition, normally, in a pachislot machine, an upper limit is set for the number of medals to be paid out in one unit game (for example, 15), and further, the prescribed time required for one unit game It is defined (for example, 4.1 seconds from the start operation of the previous game to the start operation of the current game). By using the pseudo game, for example, it is shorter than the specified time without violating these rules. Since lottery can be generated a plurality of times in time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the added lottery state, which is advantageous to the player in the pseudo-probability change state.

  In addition, the pseudo-probability change state includes “pseudo-probability change state 1” (first mode) and “pseudo-probability change state 1” (first mode) in which a relatively large number of pseudo games are determined. There is “probability change state 2” (second mode), and “pseudo-probability change state 1” (first mode) is changed to “ The process proceeds to the “pseudo-probability change state 2” (second mode). In this “pseudo-probability change state 2” (second mode), when a pseudo game is executed, the number of times of pseudo game is always determined (see (a) of FIG. 30). In addition, it is possible to enjoy the chance of lottery addition of AT times based on the pseudo internal winning combination, and it is possible to diversify the extra lottery state which is advantageous to the player in the pseudo-probability change state.

  In addition, the transition from “pseudo-probability change state 2” (second mode) to “pseudo-probability change state 1” (first mode) is based on the number of times that a pseudo game is actually performed (the number of highly secured obstacles). Therefore, it is possible to reliably enjoy the chance of lottery by adding the number of ATs based on the pseudo game in the “pseudo probability change state 2” (second mode).

  In the present embodiment, any one of “Bell Lip 1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, a transition lottery of the pseudo-probability change state is won, and a specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed. Then, the transition to the pseudo-probability change state is made, but the transition timing to the pseudo-probability change state is not limited to this. For example, the sub CPU 81 performs lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the pseudo-probability change state. When the lottery is won, a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, one of the normal replies 1 to 4) is controlled by the sub CPU 81. At the time of winning, a predetermined stop operation sequence (for example, a stop operation sequence in which “BELLIP” will win) is notified, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to “BELLIP”) is displayed. Based on the number of times being a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the main CPU 51 may shift the effect gaming state to the “pseudo-probability changing state 1” to shift to the pseudo-probability changing state.

  Further, in this case, as the predetermined stop operation order, a first predetermined stop operation order (for example, “middle right and left” when “normal lip 1”, “middle left and right” when “normal lip 3”) and The second predetermined stop operation order (for example, “middle right / left” when “normal lip 1”, “middle right / left” when “normal lip 3”) can be recognized. It is determined in advance which one of the predetermined stop operation order of 1 or the second predetermined stop operation order is to be notified, and the predetermined stop operation order is determined based on the stop operation performed in the second predetermined stop operation order. If the number of times the symbol combination is displayed is a specific number of times (for example, 2 times) or more, the main CPU 51 shifts the effect gaming state to the “pseudo-probability change state 2”. , Transitioning the production game state to “pseudo-probability change state 1” It may be. Alternatively, while a predetermined symbol combination is displayed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined order (for example, a second predetermined stop operation sequence → a first predetermined stop operation sequence → a second predetermined stop) In the order of the operation order), based on whether or not a game that has been stopped by the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order has been performed, the effect game state is set to “pseudo-probability change state 1”. Or “pseudo-probability change state 2”. In these cases, the sub CPU 81 may determine whether to notify the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order by lottery for each unit game. Furthermore, when it is determined by lottery for each unit game as to whether to notify the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order, a specific internal winning combination (for example, watermelon) At the time of winning, it may be promoted from a state in which the second predetermined stop operation order is not easily notified to a state in which the second predetermined stop operation order is easily notified.

  The transition to the pseudo-probability change state may be executed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, a lottery for shifting to the AT game or main CZ state is performed based on the determined internal winning combination, and a lottery for shifting to the AT game or main CZ state based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. Should be done.

[Main control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the main control process. The main control process described below is started when the pachislot machine 1 is powered on.

  First, when power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 51 executes the power-on process shown in FIG. 43 (S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or the setting has been changed appropriately, and an initialization process is executed according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes an initialization process at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. As a result of this initialization processing, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area, the display combination storing area, etc. of the main RAM 53 is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 44 (S12). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process for detecting a medal inserted by the player and a process for detecting a start operation are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value and stores it in a random value storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S13). Here, the random value is a value used for internal lottery processing (hereinafter, random value 1) and a value used for lock lottery processing (hereinafter, random value 2). , 0-65535.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes an internal lottery process shown in FIG. 45 (S14). The main CPU 51 that executes the internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a lock lottery process shown in FIG. 46 (S15). In the lock lottery process, lottery for determining whether or not to perform the above-mentioned “lock”, transition lottery for the production gaming state, and the like are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel stop initial setting process (S16). By the reel stop initial setting process, the various stop control information of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 53 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated start command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S17). The start command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the type of internal winning combination, the type of gaming state flag, the type of effect gaming state, the type and period of lock, and the bonus end number counter value. is there.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a wait process (S18). In this wait process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous game (start of the previous unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. Waiting time to wait is digested. The predetermined time in the wait process, that is, the wait time is set to 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49 (S19). In this lock execution process, based on the lottery result in the lock lottery process in S15, the lock at the start of the game, the reel action during the lock execution, and the like are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel rotation start process for rotating all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S20). With this reel rotation start process, “01110000” is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 26). Note that the reel rotation start control is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 (more specifically, the reel control process shown in FIG. 58). This interrupt process is a process that is periodically executed at regular intervals (1.1172 ms).

  By this interruption process, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts. Thereafter, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled by this interruption process, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is accelerated until reaching a constant speed.

  Further, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant speed, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R is controlled by this interruption process so that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate at a constant speed. Maintained. When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant speed and the reel index described above is detected, the stop operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is permitted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 ( S21). The reel rotation start command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has been started, for example.

  By receiving this reel rotation start command data, the sub-control circuit 42 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel stop control process (S22). By this reel stop control processing, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed. Although not shown, in the reel stop control process, the main CPU 51 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated reel stop command data is stored in the main RAM 53. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. The reel stop command data includes the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position (ie, the symbol position when the stop button is operated), the number of sliding pieces or the expected stop position (ie, the reel is actually scheduled to stop). The symbol position) is data that the sub CPU 81 can recognize.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a winning search process (S23). In this winning search process, after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the effective line is collated with the symbol combination table to identify the symbol combination displayed on the effective line. The

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 23) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 14) are collated, and if there is a match as a result of the collation, The data corresponding to the matched symbol combination (display combination) is stored in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 22), and the payout number (payout number counter value) associated with the combination of symbols is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a medal payout process of paying out medals of the number corresponding to the acquired payout number counter value as a result of the winning search process (S24). In this medal payout process, the control of the hopper drive circuit 65 and the update of the credit number are performed based on the payout number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a state management process shown in FIG. 51 (S25). In this state management process, the transition control of the production gaming state is executed based on the type of reel action executed, the type of winning combination, etc., and the output of the external signal from the external concentration terminal board described above is turned on or off. Is managed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes the game end lock execution process shown in FIG. 54 (S26). In the game end lock execution process, lock at the end of the game is executed based on a predetermined execution condition.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates winning action command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated winning action command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S27). . The winning operation command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the type of display combination and the payout number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a bonus end check process (S28). By this bonus end check process, a process for ending the operation of the BB is executed when the BB end condition is satisfied.

  In this bonus end check process, specifically, the current payout number counter value is subtracted from the bonus end number counter value stored in the bonus operation check process described later, and it is determined whether the value has become negative. And when it is judged that it became a negative value, the process at the time of BB completion | finish is performed. In the BB end process, the BB gaming state flag and the RB gaming state flag are turned off, and the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  Although not shown, in this bonus end check process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42, and the generated bonus end command data is stored in the main RAM 53. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. The bonus end command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize that the BB has ended, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a bonus operation check process (S29). By this bonus operation check processing, processing for operating the BB based on the combination of symbols displayed by the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed. After executing the process of step S29, the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S11.

  In this bonus operation check process, specifically, it is first determined whether or not the display combination is BB. If it is determined that the display combination is BB, the BB operation process is executed. In the BB operation process, the BB gaming state flag and the RB gaming state flag are turned on, and “75” is set as the value of the bonus end number counter. Further, the carryover combination storage area is cleared (the value of bit 0 is reset to “0”). Next, when it is determined that the display combination is not BB, it is determined whether the display combination is replay. When it is determined that the display combination is replay, an automatic insertion request is made. That is, control is performed so that the number of inserted coins (three) in the current unit game is automatically inserted in the next unit game. If it is determined that the display combination is not replay, the process is terminated.

  Although not shown, in this bonus operation check process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated bonus start command data is stored in the main RAM 53. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. This bonus start command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, that the BB has started.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the power-on process executed in step S10 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not backup is normal (S30). In this determination process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or not by error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 51 stores the set value of the pachislot machine 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value when the power is turned off in the main RAM 53 as backup data, and the determination process when the power is turned on (S30). , The set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 53 are read out.

  Then, the main CPU 51 compares the checksum calculated from the read setting value and the checksum that has been backed up, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison results match.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the backup is normal (YES), it sets the backed-up setting values and the like in the main RAM 53 (S31). As a result, when the backup is normal, the setting value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 53.

  After executing the process of step S31 or when determining that the backup is not normal in step S30 (NO), the main CPU 51 sets a setting change switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1. ) Is turned on (S32). If the main CPU 51 determines that the setting change switch is on (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an initialization process at the time of setting change (S33).

  In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the data stored in the internal symbol combination storage area, the symbol code storage area, and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 53 are cleared and the set value is cleared. Note that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area may not be cleared or may be cleared.

  In addition, in the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, the data stored in the effect game state storage area is cleared, and the highly secured obstacle game number counter and the CZ game number counter are cleared. Then, “normal game state” is set as the effect game state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated initialization command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S34). . The initialization command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, whether or not the setting value has been changed and the setting value.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a setting value changing process (S35). In this set value changing process, a set value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of a reset switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1, and subsequently, The set value selected when the start lever 16 is operated is confirmed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the setting change switch is in the on state (S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until a determination result that is not in the on state is obtained.

  Here, when the determination result that the setting change switch is not in the ON state is obtained (that is, when the setting change switch is changed from ON to OFF) (NO), the main CPU 51 performs sub-control from the main control circuit 41. Initialization command data to be transmitted to the circuit 42 is generated, the generated initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S37), and the power-on process is terminated.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S32 that the setting change switch is not on (NO), it determines whether the backup is normal (S38). If it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 51 executes power-on error processing (S39).

  In power-on error processing, the main CPU 51 displays an error display or the like that backup is not normal. Note that the main CPU 51 does not cancel the error state by an operation of a stop release switch (not shown) or a reset switch (not shown) in an error state where the backup is not normal (backup error). Therefore, the error state is canceled only when the setting is newly changed.

  If it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 51 restores the state of the pachislot machine 1 to the state before the power is turned off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 53. (S40), the power-on process is terminated.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S50). That is, it is determined whether or not a replay is won in the previous unit game.

  In step S50, when determining that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 51 executes automatic insertion processing for automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (S51). Specifically, the main CPU 51 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53. A transmission process is executed (S52). Here, the medal insertion command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, whether or not a medal has been inserted, the number of inserted counters, the value of a credit counter, and the like.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S50 that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), it accepts medal acceptance (S53). For example, the main CPU 51 drives a solenoid (not shown) of the selector 35 to form a path so that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 can pass through the selector 35.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the medal acceptance is prohibited since the medal acceptance is prohibited from the previous unit game. Is not executed, but even if the player has won a replay in the previous unit game, acceptance of medals may be permitted.

  After the processing of step S52 or S53 is executed, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the inserted number in the main RAM 53 according to the gaming state (S54). In the present embodiment, 3 is set as the maximum value of the inserted number in any gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (S55). If it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the medals are properly inserted, or whether the operation to the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B is performed. The medal insertion check process for checking is executed (S56). In this medal insertion check process, when a medal is inserted properly, or when a medal is inserted by an operation from the credit to the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B, depending on the number of inserted medals, The value of the inserted number counter or the value of the credit counter is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53. A transmission process is executed (S57).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not medals can be inserted or credited (S58). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 has a condition that the value of the insertion number counter is 3 and the value of the credit counter is 50, or that the automatic insertion process of step S51 has been executed. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined that a medal cannot be inserted or credited. When the condition is not satisfied, it is determined that a medal can be inserted or credited.

  If it is determined in step S58 that medals cannot be inserted or credited (NO), the main CPU 51 prohibits the acceptance of medals (S59). For example, the main CPU 51 forms a path so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 is discharged from the medal payout opening 24 without driving the solenoid of the selector 35.

  If it is determined in step S55 that acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), if it is determined in step S58 that medals can be inserted or credited (YES), or after the processing of step S59 is executed. The main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of medals inserted is a number that can start the game. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is 3, which is the maximum value (S60).

  If it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, when determining that the number of inserted medals is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch 16S is on (S61).

  If it is determined that the start switch 16S is not on (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start switch 6S is on (YES), the main CPU 51 prohibits the reception of medals (S62) and ends the medal reception / start check process.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state in the main RAM 53 (S70). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 sets one of the internal lottery tables shown in FIG. 15 or 16 in the main RAM 53 according to the gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random value stored in the random value storage area (S71). The random value acquired here is the random value 1. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S70, obtains one lottery value associated with each winning number of the corresponding set value, and determines the lottery value from the random number value. Is subtracted (S72). That is, the main CPU 51 collates whether or not an internal winning combination associated with the winning number is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the subtraction result obtained in step S72 is less than 0 (S73). If the main CPU 51 determines that the subtraction result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S74).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all winning numbers in the internal lottery table being used have been checked (S75). If it is determined that all winning numbers have not been checked (NO) The process returns to step S72.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that all winning numbers have been checked (YES), it sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S76). In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is set so that the subtraction result does not necessarily become 0 or more when the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers. Except for the case of (RB gaming state), step S76 is not executed.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S73 that the subtraction result is less than 0 (YES), it refers to the internal lottery table set in the main RAM 53 and determines the data pointer for the small role / replay from the winning number. The value and the value of the bonus data pointer are acquired (S77).

  After executing the processing of step S76 or S77, the main CPU 51 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 17) and determines the internal winning combination based on the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer. Is acquired (S78).

  In the process of step S78, the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination / replay is referred to, and 27 bytes indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the small combination / replay data pointer acquired in the process of step S76 or S77. Data values are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the internal winning combination data acquired in step S78 in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 21) (S79). In the process of step S79, a 27-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S78 is stored in the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 27.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S80). When the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18) and determines the internal based on the value of the bonus data pointer. A winning combination is acquired (S81).

  In the process of step S81, the bonus internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and a 27-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the process of step S76 or S77 is determined. The

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S81 in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) (S82). In the process of step S82, when “BB” is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S81, bit 0 corresponding to “BB” in the carryover storage area is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S83). In this determination process, it is determined in step S82 whether or not bit 0 corresponding to “BB” in the carryover combination storage area is set to “1”.

  If it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “BB” (S84). If the main CPU 31 determines that the internal winning combination is “BB” (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (S85). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets “1” to the RT1 gaming state flag. In the present embodiment, since the bonus combination is only “BB”, the determination process may not be executed.

  If it is determined in step S80 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), or if it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), the internal winning combination is “BB” in step S84. When it is determined that it is not (NO) or after executing the process of step S85, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S86). .

<Lock lottery processing>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the lock lottery process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (S90). Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the RT1 gaming state flag. When determining that the gaming state is not the RT1 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock lottery process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the “AT state” (S91). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the “AT state” (NO), the main CPU 51 executes a normal gaming lottery process (S102) described later in the description of FIG. 48 and ends the lock lottery process.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S91 that the effect gaming state is the “AT state” (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect gaming state is a pseudo probability change state, that is, the effect gaming state is “pseudo probability change”. It is determined whether or not “state 1” or “pseudo-probability change state 2” (S92). When it is determined that the stage game state is “pseudo-probability change state 1” or “pseudo-probability change state 2” (YES), a lottery process during pseudo-probability change state (S93) described later in the description of FIG. 47 is executed. The lock lottery process is terminated.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S92 that the effect gaming state is not “pseudo-probability change state 1” or “pseudo-probability change state 2” (NO), then the internal winning combination is any of the bell lip 1 to 4 It is determined whether or not (S94). When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is one of the bell lip 1 to 4 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a pseudo-probability changing state lottery based on the random number value 2 (S95).

  In this pseudo-probability changing state lottery, for example, a lottery is executed so as to win the transition to the pseudo-probability changing state with a probability of 512/65536 and not to win the transition to the pseudo-probability changing state with a probability of 65024/65536. .

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the pseudo-probability changing state transition lottery is a win (S96). When it is determined that the result of the pseudo-probability change state lottery is not winning (non-winning) (NO), the lock lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the result of the pseudo probability variation state transition lottery is a win (YES), the main CPU 51 determines the reel action 9 or 10 by lottery based on the random value 3 (S97). In the process of step S97, for example, the reel action 9 is determined with a probability of 192/256, and the reel action 10 is determined with a probability of 64/256.

  Here, unlike the random value 1 and the random value 2, the random value 3 is a random value that is separately generated and acquired whenever necessary in various processes in the main control process. Note that the random value 3 may be a random value generated by the random number generator 56 described above and stored in the random value storage area, similar to the random value 1 and the random value 2, A latch circuit (not shown) may be used for acquisition when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, when various switches such as the start switch 16S are turned on or off).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “pseudo-probability change state 1” or “pseudo-probability change state 2” as the effect game state according to the type of reel action (S98). For example, if the determined reel action is the reel action 9, the “pseudo probability change state 1” is set as the production gaming state, and if the determined reel action is the reel action 10, the “pseudo probability change state” is set as the production gaming state. 2 ”is set.

  Next, if the “pseudo-probability change state 2” is set as the production gaming state, the main CPU 51 sets the high secured obstacle game number 5 in the highly secured obstacle game number counter (S99), and ends the lock lottery process. To do.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S94 that the internal winning combination is not one of the bell lip 1 to 4 (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip. (S100). If the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), based on the random number value 2, executes the lottery in the push-up order for the extra lock, stores the lottery result (S101), The lock lottery process is terminated. The main CPU 51 also ends the lock lottery process when determining that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO).

<Lottery process during pseudo-probability>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing lottery processing during pseudo-probability change state executed in step S93 of the lock lottery processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the “pseudo-probability changing state 2” (S200). If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is the “pseudo-probability changing state 2” (YES), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S206.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the “pseudo-probability change state 2” (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the high-precision transition lottery table shown in FIG. The transition state is determined (S201).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is a highly accurate transition, that is, whether or not a highly reliable transition is determined as a transition state (S202). If the main CPU 51 determines that the high-accuracy transition is not determined as the transition state (the current status is determined) (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S206.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the highly accurate transition is determined as the transition state (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the highly secured obstacle game number lottery table shown in FIG. Then, the number of highly secured obstacle games is determined (S203).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the number of highly secured obstacle games determined in step S203 in the highly secured obstacle game number counter (S204), and sets “pseudo-probability change state 2” as the effect gaming state (S205). .

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo game number lottery table shown in FIG. 30A, and determines whether the random number 3 and the type of pseudo probability change state, that is, the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 1”. Based on whether the “pseudo-probability change state 2”, the number of pseudo games is determined (S206), and the number of pseudo games determined in step S206 is set in the pseudo game number counter (S207).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S208). When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. Is determined (S209), and the lottery process during the pseudo-probability change state is terminated. Further, the main CPU 51 also ends the lottery process during the pseudo-probability changing state even when it is determined that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES).

<Lottery processing during normal game>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal game lottery processing executed in step S102 of the lock lottery processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a confirmed combination (S220). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a cherry lip, a strong cherry lip, or a strong bell. When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a confirmed combination (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the determined combination reel action lottery table shown in FIG. Then, the type of the special reel action (any of special reel actions 1 to 4) is determined (S221), and the lottery process during the normal game is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a finalized combination (NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not the main CZ state is in effect, that is, the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “ It is determined whether or not the main CZ state 2 "(S222). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (NO), the lottery process during normal gaming is terminated.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S222 that the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (YES), the reel action 7 or 8 is subsequently set. It is determined whether or not there is (S223). If the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action 7 or 8 is set (YES), the lottery process during the normal game ends.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S223 that the reel action 7 or 8 is not set (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the main CZ state reel action lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the CZ game number counter value (how many games are in the main CZ state) and the random number value 2 are the production game states being “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2”? Then, one of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined (S224).

  Next, the main CPU 51 increments the CZ game number counter by 1 (S225), and ends the normal game lottery process.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the production game state is “normal game state” and the internal winning combination is a push order small combination (the small combination / replay data pointer is In the case of any one of “17” to “40”), when the stop button 17L is not operated by the first stop operation, the lottery process during the normal game is performed for a predetermined game (for example, 10 games). It may be configured not to be broken (that is, a “penalty” is given). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a pachislot machine developer and a player from gaining an unintended profit.

<Lock execution process at game start>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the game start lock execution process executed in step S19 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a special reel action has been determined (S110). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of special reel actions 1 to 4 has been determined in the above-described lottery process during normal gaming in the previous game. If it is determined that the special reel action has been determined (YES), an effect timer corresponding to the type of the special reel action is set (S111), and the process proceeds to step S114. In the process of step S111, for example, when special reel action 1 is determined, “3581” (about 4 seconds) is set as the production timer, and when special reel action 4 is determined, By setting “13427” (about 15 seconds) as an effect timer, control is performed so that the lock is executed while the special reel action is executed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the reel action has been determined (S112). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of reel actions 1 to 8 has been determined in the above-described normal game lottery process in the previous game or the current game. If it is determined that the reel action has been determined (YES), an effect timer corresponding to the type of reel action is set (S113). In the process of step S113, for example, when reel action 1 is determined, “1791” (about 2 seconds) is set as the effect timer, and when reel action 6 or 8 is determined, “8951” (about 10 seconds) is set as a production timer.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, stores the generated lock command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S114), and game The lock execution process at the start ends. Here, the lock command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the value of the effect timer, the type of special reel action, the type of reel action, and the type of pseudo internal winning combination.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S112 that the reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S115). If the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES), the game start lock execution process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), a pseudo game effect timer is set (S116). Here, an effect timer value (for example, “26853” (about 30 seconds)) determined in advance as being necessary for each pseudo game is set in the effect timer for the pseudo game.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (S117). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a pseudo internal winning combination has already been determined in S209 in the lottery process during the pseudo probability changing state described above. If the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (YES), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S119. When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. A pseudo internal winning combination is determined (S118).

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates the above-described lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the generated lock command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S119). 50, a pseudo game process (S120) described later in the description of FIG. 50 is executed, and the pseudo game number counter is decremented by 1 (S121).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S122). When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S116.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a random delay process (S123) and ends the game start lock execution process.

(Random delay processing)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo game process described later in the description of FIG. 50 is completed, the reels 3L, 3C are processed by the reel rotation start process executed in step S20 of the main control process shown in FIG. 3R starts to rotate. For example, when the execution of the lock at the start of the game is finished after the “watermelon” symbol set is pseudo-stopped, the reel 3L, The original rotation of 3C and 3R will be started, and there is a risk that the adjustment will harm the fairness of the game. This is because a player can easily grasp the timing of the stop operation by performing a reel effect (for example, a pseudo game). If no action is taken, the reel effect is not intended. This is because it would have an auxiliary function of pushing without it.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined symbol is displayed at the end of execution of the game start lock (in the above example, “watermelon” symbols are aligned). In this case, a predetermined random number value (for example, random number value 3) is acquired for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, a timer is set based on the acquired random number value, and the number of interruptions of the set timer, The start of reel rotation is randomly delayed.

  With this configuration, even when performing an effect by a reel (for example, a pseudo game), there is no risk of an adjustment that harms the fairness of the game, and the game is started (the original rotation of the reel is started). ).

<Pseudo game processing>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game process executed in step S120 of the game start lock execution process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 detects a reel index for each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the reel position detection circuit 63 described above (S129). That is, the main CPU 51 starts rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo rotation”) for the purpose of performing a pseudo game by a reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG. The symbol positions of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R can be detected.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a stop operation (pseudo stop operation) has been performed on a pseudo-stoppable reel (S130). That is, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R being pseudo-rotated are operated.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that a stop operation has been performed on a reel that can be pseudo-stopped (YES), the main CPU 51 pseudo-stops the reel at a pseudo-stop position corresponding to the determined pseudo internal winning combination (S131). For example, when a watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by a player, a “watermelon” pattern is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. Pseudo-stop.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets pseudo-stop state holding data corresponding to the type of reel that has been pseudo-stopped (S132). Thus, for example, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled so that the rotation in the reverse rotation direction and the rotation in the forward rotation direction are alternately performed at different timings. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R that are in a pseudo stop seem to vibrate in the vertical direction, so that each reel is stopped by the pseudo stop control and the normal stop control is performed. It is possible to prevent confusion between the stop of each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether there is a pseudo-stoppable reel (S133). That is, it is determined whether or not there is still a pseudo-rotating reel. If it is determined that there is a pseudo-stoppable reel (YES), the process returns to step S130. If it is determined that there is no pseudo-stoppable reel (NO), the process proceeds to step S136.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S130 that the pseudo-stoppable reel is not stopped (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S134). . If it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the process returns to step S130. If it is determined that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the determined pseudo internal winning combination is determined. The reel action corresponding to is set (S135), and the process proceeds to step S138.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when a pseudo game is performed, and the player has not operated the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R, it is determined according to the determined pseudo internal winning combination. Since the reel action is set and the reel is automatically pseudo-stopped at the pseudo stop position according to the determined pseudo internal winning combination, even for a player who did not perform the pseudo stop operation The reel production by the pseudo game can be surely enjoyed.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S133 that there is no pseudo-stoppable reel (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not a bet button has been operated (S136). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an operation on the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B. When the main CPU 51 determines that the bet button has been operated (YES), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S138.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bet button has not been operated (NO), it subsequently determines whether the effect timer is 0 (S137). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S136.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S137 that the effect timer is 0 (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not there has been a start lever operation (pseudo start operation) (S138). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated. If it is determined that the start lever is not operated (NO), the process of step S138 is repeatedly executed. As a result, even if one pseudo game is automatically advanced, the next pseudo game is started based on the player's pseudo start operation. The reel production can be surely enjoyed, and the benefit of the determination of the addition based on the pseudo internal winning combination can be surely enjoyed.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S138 that there is an operation of the start lever (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S139). If it is determined that the performance timer is 0 (YES), the pseudo game process is terminated. When it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the effect timer is updated to 0 (S140), and the pseudo game process is terminated.

  Note that the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 even when it is determined in step S138 that the start lever is not operated (NO), and the effect timer is 0. If it is determined, the pseudo game process may be terminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the pseudo game from hindering the smooth progress of the normal game.

  Further, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S130 that a pseudo-stoppable reel has been operated (YES), in step S136 it is determined that a bet button has been operated (YES), in step S138. When it is determined that there is an operation of the start lever (YES), in any one or a plurality of cases, or in all cases, a predetermined value is added to the production timer or the initial value is reset to the production timer It is good to do. By configuring in this way, the player performing each operation described above in the pseudo game can be surely enjoyed the reel production by the pseudo game while the production timer is not set to 0, It is possible to prevent the reel production by the pseudo game from becoming redundant more than necessary.

<State management process>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the state management process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the “AT state” (S150). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is “AT state” (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an AT state management process (S151), which will be described later in the description of FIG. 52, and proceeds to the process of step S160. .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the “AT state” (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not it is the main CZ state, that is, the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1”. Or “main CZ state 2” is determined (S152). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (YES), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S155.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S152 that the effect gaming state is not “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (NO), then the main CPU 51 wins a strong chance lip at the first left stop. In other words, “strong chance lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “11”) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the left reel 3L is first stopped. It is determined whether or not any of “A1-6” or “Special Lip B” has been won (S153). If it is determined that a strong chance lip is won in the first left stop (YES), “main CZ state 1” is set as the effect gaming state (S154), and the process proceeds to step S160. Also, when it is determined that the strong left lip is not won in the first left stop (NO), the process proceeds to step S160.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S152 that the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (YES), is the reel action 3 or 4 subsequently executed? It is determined whether or not (S155). If it is determined that the reel action 3 or 4 has been executed (YES), “main CZ state 2” is set as the effect gaming state (S156), and the state management process ends.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action 3 or 4 has not been executed (NO), it subsequently determines whether any of the reel actions 5 to 8 has been executed (S157). When the main CPU 51 determines that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 has been executed (YES), the main game 51 clears the set effect gaming state, “main CZ state 1”, or “main CZ state 2”. (S159) The state management process is terminated.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S157 that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is not executed (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 8 (S158). ). When the main CPU 51 determines that the CZ game number counter is 8 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the process of S159 described above and ends the state management process. The main CPU 51 also ends the state management process when determining that the CZ game number counter is not 8 (NO).

<AT state management process>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the in-AT state management process executed in step S151 of the state management process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the “pseudo-probability changing state 2” (S230). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is “pseudo-probability change state 2” (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not a pseudo game has been executed (S231). Specifically, in step S206 of the lottery process during pseudo probability change state shown in FIG. 47, one or more pseudo games are determined. In step S120 of the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the process has been executed. When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game is not being executed (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S236.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S231 that the pseudo game has been executed (YES), the main CPU 51 decrements the high secured obstacle game number counter by 1 (S232). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the highly secured obstacle game number counter is 0 (S233). When the main CPU 51 determines that the highly secured obstacle game number counter is 0 (YES), it sets “pseudo-probability changed state 1” as the effect gaming state (S234), and proceeds to the process of step S236. That is, the main CPU 51 ends the effect gaming state “pseudo-probability change state 2” based on the fact that the highly secured obstacle game number counter has become zero. The main CPU 51 also proceeds to the process of step S236 when determining that the highly secured obstacle game number counter is not 0 (YES).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S230 that the effect gaming state is not “pseudo-probability change state 2” (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not the effect game state is “pseudo-probability change state 1”. Judgment is made (S235). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the “pseudo-probability changing state 1” (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S238.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S235 that the effect gaming state is “pseudo-probability changing state 1” (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not a prize has been won for the bell lip (S236). If it is determined that the bell lip has not been won (NO), the process proceeds to step S238. If it is determined that a prize has been won for the bell lip (YES), the pseudo-probability change state is cleared (S237). That is, the winning of the bell lip is the end condition of the production game state “pseudo-probability change state 1” and “pseudo-probability change state 2”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not any of the bells has been won (S238). Specifically, one of “middle left and right bells”, “middle right and left bells”, “right left and middle bells” and “right middle and left bells” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols (see FIG. 14) related to any small combination for which seven medals are to be paid out has been won. If the main CPU 51 determines that any of the bells has been won (YES), the AT game winning number counter is incremented by 1 (S239), and the AT state management process is terminated. The main CPU 51 also ends the in-AT state management process even when it is determined that any of the bells has not been won (NO).

  Note that, in step S238, the main CPU 51 may determine whether or not any of the bells has been won instead of whether or not any of the bells has been won. Specifically, one of “middle left and right bells”, “middle right and left bells”, “right left and middle bells” and “right middle and left bells” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined whether or not any of the bells has been won, the process of step S239 may be executed. In other words, the winning counter during AT gaming may be a counter that is updated by winning the “push order small combination”. By configuring in this way, for example, in an AT game, between a player who has performed a stop operation while ignoring the notified stop operation sequence, and a player who has performed a stop operation in accordance with the notified stop operation sequence, Since there is a difference in the profits obtained, it is possible to increase the tension of the game in AT games and improve the interest of the game.

<External signal output management processing>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the external signal output management process executed in step S160 of the state management process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the external signal 1 functions as a signal for displaying the number of AT games to be continued, that is, how long the AT game is continued on an external display or the like, and the external signal 2 is It functions as a signal for displaying on the external display or the like the initial number of AT games, that is, the transition from the normal game to the AT game.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether only the external signal 2 is on, that is, only the external signal 2 is output (S250). If it is determined that only the external signal 2 is ON (YES), the external signal 1 is set to ON, that is, the output of the external signal 1 is started (S251), the AT game winning number counter, the AT end check counter Is set to an initial value (for example, 0) (S252), and the external signal output management process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that only the external signal 2 is not ON (NO), subsequently, both the external signals 1 and 2 are ON, that is, whether both the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output. Is determined (S253).

  If the main CPU 51 determines that both the external signals 1 and 2 are ON (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the AT game winning number counter is a predetermined value (S254). Here, for example, “38” is defined as the predetermined value. When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT game winning number counter is a predetermined value (YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the external signal 1, that is, ends the output of the external signal 1 (S255), and the external signal output management process Exit.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S254 that the AT game winning number counter is not a predetermined value (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the first middle / right stop is made when the pushing order bell is won ( S256). Specifically, one of “middle left and right bells”, “middle right and left bells”, “right left and middle bells” and “right middle and left bells” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined that the first reel 3C or the right reel 3R has been first stopped.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S256 that the middle / right first stop has been made when the push order bell is won (YES), it subsequently determines whether the AT end check counter is 1 or more (S257). ). If the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management process. If the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 0) in the AT end check counter (S258), and performs external signal output management processing. finish.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S256 that the first middle / right stop has not been made when the pushing order bell is won (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently judges whether or not the first left stop has been made when the pushing order bell is won. (S259). Specifically, one of “middle left and right bells”, “middle right and left bells”, “right left and middle bells” and “right middle and left bells” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined that the first reel 3L has been operated for the first stop. If the main CPU 51 determines that the first left stop has not been stopped when the pushing order bell is won (NO), the external signal output management process ends.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S259 that the first left stop is made when the pushing order bell is won (YES), the AT end check counter is incremented by 1 (S260), and then the AT end check counter is 2. It is determined whether or not there is (S261). When determining that the AT end check counter is not 2 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management process.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S261 that the AT end check counter is 2 (YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the external signals 1 and 2, that is, ends the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 (S262). ), Clearing the set effect gaming state, “AT state” (S263), and ends the external signal output management process.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S253 that both the external signals 1 and 2 are not ON (NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not any bell has been won in the first middle / right stop. Judgment is made (S264). Specifically, one of “middle left and right bells”, “middle right and left bells”, “right left and middle bells” and “right middle and left bells” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Whether or not the combination of symbols (see FIG. 14) related to any of the small roles that the first reel 3C or the right reel 3R is operated for the first stop and 7 medals are to be paid out. Judging. If the main CPU 51 determines that any of the bells has been won in the first middle / right stop (YES), it increments the normal game winning number counter by 1 (S265).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning counter during normal game is 3 (S266). When the main CPU 51 determines that the number-of-wins counter during the normal game is not 3 (NO), the external signal output management process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number-of-wins counter during normal gaming is 3 (YES), the external signal 2 is turned on, that is, the output of the external signal 2 is started (S267), and the effect gaming state is set. “AT state” is set (S268), and the external signal output management process is terminated.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S264 that the first middle / right stop has not won any of the bells (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the first left stop was made when the pushing order bell was won. Is determined (S269). Specifically, one of “middle left and right bells”, “middle right and left bells”, “right left and middle bells” and “right middle and left bells” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined that the first reel 3L has been operated for the first stop. If the main CPU 51 determines that the first left stop has not been stopped when the pushing order bell is won (NO), the external signal output management process ends. Further, when the main CPU 51 determines that the first left stop is made when the pushing order bell is won (YES), it sets an initial value (for example, 0) in the normal game winning number counter (S270) and outputs an external signal. The management process ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the start condition for shifting to the AT game is established, and after shifting from the normal game to the AT game, the value of the winning counter in the normal game becomes 3 (that is, “push” Based on the fact that the correct answer is “3 consecutive consecutive pushes when winning the winning role”, the production gaming state is shifted to the “AT state” and the output of the external signal 2 is started. Based on the fact that only 2 is output, the output of the external signal 1 is started, and when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the AT game winning number counter becomes 38. (In other words, in the “AT state”), only the output of the external signal 1 is ended based on the fact that the number of winnings of “push order small combination” is 38 times. Here, when the AT game continues, the output of the external signal 1 is started again in the next game. In addition, when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the AT end check counter becomes 2 (that is, the push order is incorrect for two consecutive times when the “push order small role” is won) Based on this, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 is terminated.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, an AT display which is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is output by outputting at least two types of external signals from the external concentration terminal board of the pachislot machine 1, etc. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately display the number of initial hits of the AT game that are of great interest to the player and the number of continuations of the AT game using an external display or the like. Further, since the output timing of the external signal 1 and the output timing of the external signal 2 can be made different with a simple configuration, the control burden on the external display side can be reduced and a communication error or the like can occur. Can also be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for starting the output of the external signal 2 is that the value of the winning counter in the normal game is 3 (that is, the correct answer of the push order is three consecutive times when the “push order small role” is won. It is configured so that the establishment thereof comes later than the start condition for shifting to the AT game (the start of the AT game by the control of the sub CPU 81).

  In the present embodiment, the condition for terminating the output of the external signal 1 is that the value of the winning counter in the AT game is 38 (that is, in the “AT state”, The number of winnings is 38) and the establishment of the AT game ends later than the end condition (the end of the AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81). Specifically, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 73, when “150” is set as the initial value of the AT management difference counter, the addition of the AT game winning number counter starts. Since it is after winning the “push order small combination” three times, the value of the AT management difference sheet counter at that time is “150−4 sheets × 3 times = 138”. After that, in the “AT state”, when the number of wins for “push order small combination” reaches 35, the value of the AT management difference sheet counter becomes “138−4 sheets × 35 times = −2”. The condition for terminating the output of the external signal 1 comes later than the termination condition for ending the AT game.

  Then, when the AT game ends, when the value of the AT end check counter reaches 2, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 is ended, and when the AT game continues, the value of the AT end check counter Before the value becomes 2, the value of the AT game winning number counter becomes 38, once the output of the external signal 1 is finished, and then the output of the external signal 1 is started again, thereby representing the number of continuous ATs. Information can be displayed on an external display. Note that the initial value “150” of the AT management difference sheet counter can be replaced with the AT number “38 times”. Therefore, if the AT number “38 times” is regarded as one set, the external signal 1 is output. It can also be said that information indicating how many sets of one AT game have been played can be displayed on the external display.

  By configuring in this way, the start and end of the AT game can be notified to the player more quickly by the notification by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like than the display by the external display or the like. The convenience of the player who is playing can be improved. In addition, since the subtraction value of the AT management difference number counter resulting from winning the “push order small combination” and the number of winnings show almost the same value, in particular, the AT game continuation number (1 set), It is possible to display appropriately with a simple configuration.

<Lock execution process at the end of the game>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the game end lock execution process executed in step S26 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (S170). If the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO), the game end lock execution process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not a stop operation is performed in the push-up order for the extra lock (S171). Here, the push-up order for the extra lock is the stop operation order stored in S101 of the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 46, specifically, the first left stop (that is, the stop operation order “left middle right” ”Or“ left / right / middle ”), which is determined by lottery among the four stop operation orders (ie, stop operation order“ middle left / right ”,“ middle right / left ”,“ right left / middle ”or“ right middle / left ”) This is one stop operation sequence. When the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation is not performed in the order of pushing for the extra lock (NO), the lock execution process at the end of the game is ended.

  If the main CPU determines in step S171 that the stop operation has been performed in the push-up order for the additional lock (YES), the lock data is set after all stops (S173), and “3581” (about 4 seconds) is set in the effect timer. ) Is set (S174), the above-described lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 is generated, and the generated lock command data is stored in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S175). ), The lock execution process at the end of the game ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, if the winning operation is performed with the stop operation performed at the first left stop, the effect gaming state If “normal game state”, the effect game state shifts to “main CZ state 1”, but if the effect game state is “AT state”, no profit is given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the AT game is started by the control of the sub CPU 81, the effect game state is shifted to the “AT state” by the control of the main CPU 51. When the production gaming state is not “AT state” (this state may be referred to as “AT preparation state”), the production gaming state is “main CZ state 1”. It is not appropriate to move to.

  On the other hand, although the winning probability of the strong chance lip does not change depending on each production gaming state or whether it is a normal game or an AT game (see FIG. 15), there is no profit depending on the winning timing of the strong chance lip. It is also not appropriate that is no longer granted.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, the push-up order for the extra lock is determined by lottery, and the stop operation is performed by the decided push-up order for the extra lock. In such a case, a benefit different from the benefit of shifting the effect gaming state to the “main CZ state 1” is given.

  Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, during the normal game, the sub CPU 81 controls to execute the notification of the stop operation order for causing the player to make the first left stop, Alternatively, when a penalty is given as described above, the stop operation sequence is not executed by causing the player to perform a stop operation by the first left stop, and the effect gaming state is set to “main CZ state 1”. To give the benefit of shifting to.

  On the other hand, in the AT game or the AT preparation state, the sub CPU 81 performs control to determine whether or not to notify the push-up order for the extra lock, and when the lottery result is a win, A notification of the stop operation sequence related to the determined push-up order for the additional lock is executed, and if the stop operation is performed according to this notification, the lock at the end of the game based on the lock data is executed after the all stop, and at the end of the game Based on the fact that the lock is executed, the lottery of addition (addition) of the number of ATs is executed, and the benefit of addition (addition) of the number of ATs is given.

  By configuring in this way, in an AT game or in an AT preparation state, a transition to a chance zone state (main CZ state) in which a reel action (for example, reel actions 1 to 8) can occur is prevented. A specific internal winning combination (for example, a strong chance lip) has been determined even if the game content is prevented from being obfuscated and is not shifted to the chance zone state (main CZ state). The profit based on can be given to the player as a different profit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to give different profits as described above can be performed by the control of the sub CPU 81, so that the player's profit and the game hall profit can be reduced with a simple configuration. It will be possible to properly manage equity.

<Interrupt processing under main CPU control>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 51. This process is executed every 1.1172 ms.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S320). Next, the main CPU 51 executes an input port check process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 (S321). In this input port check process, for example, the presence or absence of signals from various switches and sensors connected to the main CPU 51 is confirmed.

  For example, the main CPU 51 stores in the main RAM 53 information on on / off edges of various switches such as the start switch 16S and stop switch 17S and information on the on / off of various sensors such as the medal sensor 35S.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes timer update processing (S322). Next, the main CPU 51 executes communication data transmission processing, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 57 (S323). Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel control process which will be described later in the description of FIG. 57 (S324).

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a lamp / 7SEG drive process (S325). For example, the main CPU 51 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, etc. on various display units. Next, the main CPU 51 restores the register (S326), and terminates the interrupt process that occurs periodically.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 51 stores the previous interrupt, that is, the state of the input port before one interrupt in the main RAM 53 (S331), and stores the current input port state in the main RAM 53 (S332).

  In this way, by comparing the state of the input port before one interrupt with the current state of the input port, the main CPU 51 can check the state of both input ports. It is checked whether the state has changed, for example, whether the MAX bet button 15A, the 1BET button 15B, the start lever 16 or the like has been operated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 53 (S333). For example, the main CPU 51 has changed to an on edge when the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 16S is data indicating off before one interrupt, but is currently data indicating on. On-edge information indicating this is stored in the main RAM 53, and the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 16S is data indicating ON before one interrupt, but is currently data indicating OFF. If there is, off-edge information indicating the transition to off-edge is stored in the main RAM 53.

<Communication data transmission processing>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the communication data transmission process executed in step S323 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the communication data transmission timer (S340). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the communication data transmission timer is 0 (S341).

  Here, when it is determined that the communication data transmission timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the communication data transmission process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the communication data transmission timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (S342).

  If it is determined that there is no untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (NO), the main CPU 51 generates no-operation command data, and the generated no-operation command data is assigned to the main RAM 53 as communication data. Store in the storage area (S343).

  The no-operation command data is set with various parameters such as on-edge / off-edge information of various switches and on / off information of various sensors stored in the input port check process described above. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal action against command transmission by preventing an interrupt process in which a command is not transmitted, and to make the sub CPU 81 recognize these pieces of information so that the operation is originally invalid. An effect can be changed based on an operation (for example, operation on the MAX bet button 15A during reel rotation).

  If it is determined in step S342 that there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (YES), or after executing the process of step S343, the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 14) in the communication data transmission timer. (S344).

  Next, the main CPU 51 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 42 (S345). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not transmission of communication data has been completed (S346).

  If it is determined that the transmission of communication data has not been completed (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S345. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transmission of communication data is completed (YES), the main CPU 51 updates the communication data storage area to be cleared (S347), and ends the communication data transmission process.

<Reel control processing>
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the reel control process executed in step S324 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a reel action has been determined (S271). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the above-described reel actions 1 to 14 (reel actions 11 to 14 include a pseudo internal winning combination) or special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined. If the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action has been determined (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a reel effect control process (S272) described later in the description of FIG. 59, and ends the reel control process. Although not shown in the drawing, the main CPU 51 also determines the reel action execution timing, and determines whether or not to perform step S272. For example, since the reel actions 7 and 8 execute the reel action at the next game of the determined game, when the reel actions 7 and 8 are determined, the main CPU 51 plays the game of the next game. The start time (when the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49 is executed) is determined as the execution time, and the process of step S272 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 executes the normal reel control process (S273) and ends the reel control process.

  Here, in this normal reel control process, the main CPU 51 controls the rotation of each reel by controlling the driving of each stepping motor based on the rotation start request of each reel in the reel rotation start process (S20 in FIG. 42). Acceleration processing is executed, and each stepping motor is driven and controlled based on the fact that each reel has reached a predetermined speed (for example, 80 revolutions per minute), thereby maintaining the predetermined speed. A stop process is executed to stop the rotation of each reel by controlling the driving of each stepping motor based on the request to stop the rotation of each reel in the stop control process (S22 in FIG. 42).

<Reel effect control processing>
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the reel effect control process executed in step S272 of the reel control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets reel effect selection data according to the type of reel action (S274). Here, the reel effect selection data is data configured as shown by way of example in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a production target reel selection process (S275). Specifically, the main CPU 51 selects the most appropriate effect target reel in performing the reel effect according to the set reel effect selection data. For example, when the reel effect selection data corresponds to a reel effect in which each reel is rotated in the order of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, in this effect target reel selection process, The effect reels are selected in the order of 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. In addition, the selection aspect of the production target reel is not limited to this. For example, among the reels in pseudo rotation, the reels may be set in a predetermined order (for example, the order of setting the reel on the left side), or may be set at random. Further, the reel effect selection data may include data capable of identifying the order in which the effect target reels are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the reel production selection data, the number of productions according to the production reel corresponding to the production reel, and the excitation output selection data (S276). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, when the reel effect selection data is “1” and the effect target reel is the middle reel 3C, when the process of step S276 is first executed, 1 is set as the effect count. The excitation output table for reverse acceleration rotation is set as excitation output selection data. Further, in the process of step S276, when the effect target reel is changed in the effect target reel change control process of step S288 described later, the number of effects to be resumed and the excitation output selection data are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the excitation output selection data is symbol position adjustment data (S277). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, the excitation output selection data is symbol position adjustment data 1 or Whether or not 2 is determined. When the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output selection data is not the symbol position adjustment data (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S279. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output selection data is symbol position adjustment data (YES), the main CPU 51 executes reel effect adjustment output processing (S278) described later in the description of FIGS.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets an effect excitation output table based on the excitation output selection data or the result of the reel effect adjustment output process (S279). The result of the reel effect adjustment output process will be described later in the description of FIGS.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the set production excitation output table, and sets the excitation direction data and the top data of the production excitation timer (S280). Here, the effect excitation output table is a table configured as shown in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 outputs excitation data based on the excitation direction data, and decrements the effect excitation timer by 1 (S281). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect excitation timer is 0 (S282). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect excitation timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S281.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect excitation timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the effect excitation output table that has been set, and updates the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer (S283). ). Specifically, when the excitation direction data and the start data of the effect excitation timer are set, and it is determined that the effect excitation timer is 0, the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer are started from the start. Update to the second data (that is, the next data). If the next data in the effect excitation output table is an end code, the data is updated to the end code.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the effect excitation output table is an end code (S284). If the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the effect excitation output table is not an end code (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S281. On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the effect excitation output table is an end code (YES), then the main CPU 51 subsequently executes excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data for the number of effects. Is determined (S285). When the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has not been executed for the number of effects (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S280.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S285 that the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has been executed for the number of times of production (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the reel production selection data that has been set, The excitation output selection data is updated (S286). Specifically, the number of effects and the excitation output selection data are updated to the following data. When the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data (S287). When the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the reel effect selection data is not the effect phase end data (NO), the main CPU 51 executes the effect target reel change control process (S288) and returns to the process of step S276. In the effect target reel change control process, the main CPU 51 performs other effect target reels (for example, the middle reel 3C, etc.) during the effect control of one effect target reel (for example, the left reel 3L). Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the production control of the right reel 3R) should be started or restarted, and if it is determined that the production control reel should be started or restarted, the production reel is selected as one production target reel (for example, , The left reel 3L) is changed to another effect target reel (for example, the middle reel 3C). By configuring in this way, for example, in the reel production selection data, even if there are many production times and excitation output selection data defined for a specific production target reel, other production target reels are linked. Therefore, the intended reel effect can be executed smoothly. Whether or not to change the production target reel may be determined according to the number of productions specified and / or the number of excitation output selection data, and a dedicated change control timer is set, The determination may be made based on the fact that the change control timer is 0 and the processing in step S286 is completed. Further, the reel effect selection data may include data indicating that the effect target reel should be changed and data that can identify the change target effect target reel.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect has ended on all reels (S289). ). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data for all effect target reels. When the main CPU 51 determines that the effects have not been completed for all the reels (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S275. If the main CPU 51 determines that the effects have been completed for all the reels (YES), the reel effect control process ends.

<Reel production adjustment output processing>
60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the reel effect adjustment output process executed in step S278 of the reel effect control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is symbol position adjustment data 1 (S290). When the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol position adjustment data is symbol position adjustment data 1 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an effect symbol position update process (S291) described later in the description of FIG. It is determined whether or not the position is 0 (S292). If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S294.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S292 that the effect symbol position is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set reel effect selection data and updates the effect count and excitation output selection data ( S293). Specifically, the number of effects and the excitation output selection data are updated to the following data. When the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets a reverse rotation excitation output table as an effect excitation output table (S294), and ends the reel effect adjustment output process. Here, the reverse rotation excitation output table is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S290 that the symbol position adjustment data is not the symbol position adjustment data 1 (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 3. Judgment is made (S295). When the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol position adjustment data is symbol position adjustment data 3 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an effect symbol position update process (S296) described later in the description of FIG. As described above, the constant speed rotation excitation output table 1 is set (S297), and the reel effect adjustment output process is terminated. Here, the constant speed rotation excitation output table 1 is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S295 that the symbol position adjustment data is not the symbol position adjustment data 3 (YES), that is, it is assumed that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 2 in the description of FIG. The effect symbol position update process (S298) described later is executed, and then it is determined whether the effect symbol position is data of less than one rotation (S299). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol position updated in the effect symbol position update process in step S298 is an identifiable symbol position without detecting the reel index. That is, the reel index is detected when each reel has reached the reference position (position where the symbol position data is 0) by the reel position detection circuit 63. The main CPU 51 uses the effect symbol position as the reference. It is determined whether or not the symbol position passes through the position.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is not data less than one rotation (NO), the acceleration output excitation output table is set as the effect excitation output table (S300), and the reel effect adjustment output processing is performed. finish. Here, the acceleration rotation excitation output table is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is data of less than one rotation (YES), it subsequently determines whether it is the effect symbol position search phase (S301). In the example of the reel effect selection data shown in FIG. 38, illustration is omitted, but a plurality of symbol position adjustment data is defined as excitation output selection data in one reel effect selection data. In this case, data indicating whether to collate with effect symbol position search data to be described later is further defined, and based on the data, it is determined whether or not it is the effect symbol position search phase. Will be.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that it is not the effect symbol position search phase (NO), it sets the constant speed rotation excitation output table 2 as the effect excitation output table (S308), and ends the reel effect adjustment output process. . Here, the constant speed rotation excitation output table 2 is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that it is the effect symbol position search phase (YES), it sets the effect symbol position search data and the number of searches corresponding to the type of reel action and the effect target reel (S302). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 40, when the reel action 9 is determined and the effect target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), the effect symbol position search data is 2 (the symbol position data is 2). Data indicating that position) is set, and 1 is set as the number of searches.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect symbol position matches the effect symbol position search data (S303). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position and the effect symbol position search data match (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set reel effect selection data and updates the effect count and excitation output selection data ( S304). Specifically, the number of effects and the excitation output selection data are updated to the following data. When the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data. Next, the main CPU 51 executes the process of S308 described above, and ends the reel effect adjustment output process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position and the effect symbol position search data do not match (NO), the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the number of searches (S305), and then determines whether or not the number of searches is 0. Is determined (S306). When determining that the number of searches is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the effect symbol position search data (S307) and returns to the process of step S303.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S306 that the number of searches is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the above-described processing of S308 and ends the reel effect adjustment output processing.

<Production symbol position update processing>
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol position update process executed in steps S291, S296, and S298 of the reel effect adjustment output process shown in FIGS.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets the stop position at the end of the previous game or the end of the previous reel effect as the effect symbol position (S310). That is, when the symbol position adjustment data is at the beginning of the reel effect selection data, the stop position at the end of the previous game is set as the effect symbol position, and the symbol position adjustment data is in the middle or at the end of the reel effect selection data. In this case, the stop position at the end of the previous reel effect (that is, at the end of excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data before the symbol position adjustment data) is set as the effect symbol position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the previous input state of the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) and the current input state of the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) (S311). Specifically, the information of the on edge or the off edge related to the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) stored in the input port check process shown in FIG. 56 is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is off-edge (S312). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether the input data of the input port assigned to the reel position detection circuit 63 is data indicating ON in the previous time but is data indicating OFF this time.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is off-edge (YES), the effect symbol position is cleared (S313), and the effect symbol position update process ends. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is not off-edge (NO), the effect symbol position is incremented by 1 (S314), and the effect symbol position update process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reel effect (effect based on the symbol variation mode) is executed based on the reel effect selection data, the symbol position adjustment data is defined in the reel effect selection data. Is configured to update the effect symbol position, select an effect excitation output table in accordance with the updated effect symbol position and the type of symbol position adjustment data, and perform excitation output control. For example, even in the case of performing excitation output control by the same forward rotation, if a small amount of rotation is sufficient according to the type of updated effect symbol position and symbol position adjustment data, excitation output for constant speed rotation When the table 1 or 2 is set and a large amount of rotation is required, the acceleration output excitation output table is set. In other words, there is no need to always search for the symbol position and execute the reel production, and it is not necessary to specify all types of reel production selection data. Reel production can be performed. Therefore, even if a reel design position shift occurs before the start of the reel effect or during the reel effect, the shift is adjusted without increasing the control burden, and the intended reel effect is achieved by the player. Can be enjoyed.

[Sub-control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 75.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the power-on process of the sub CPU 81 when the power is turned on.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process (S350). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs error check of the sub RAM 83 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, which is a task group for timer interrupt synchronization, and a sound control task.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 64 (S351). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 81 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted every 2 milliseconds to the sub CPU 81, and in response to receiving this timer interrupt event message, It is a process which performs the process which controls a lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S352). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 81 controls the sound output state from the speakers 20L and 20R. Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the mother task (S353) and ends the power-on process. In the mother task, a main board communication task shown in FIG. 66 and a display control task (not shown) for controlling display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are activated.

<Ramp control task>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task activated in step S351 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S360). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a lamp related data initialization process (S361).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 waits for a timer interrupt (S362). In this process, the sub CPU 81 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 81 receives a timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

  As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group for command reception interrupt synchronization can be cited. Moreover, a task group (not shown) for power supply interrupt synchronization, a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like can be given.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S363). In this process, the task in the next priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed.

  In this embodiment, the priority order of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization is basically the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task at the next priority of the lamp control task is executed. In step S363, the processes in steps S372 and S373 are executed in the sound control task shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes lamp data analysis processing (S364), executes lamp effect execution processing (S365), and returns to the processing of step S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task activated in step S352 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process for sound-related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 20L and 20R (S370). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a task in the next priority of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization that is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes sound data analysis processing (S372), performs sound effect execution processing (S373), and executes processing in step S371.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task activated in the mother task activated in step S353 shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 81 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S380), and checks the received command (S381).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S382). If it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 returns to the process of step S381.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the received command is a regular command, creates game information from the received command, and creates it. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 83 (S383). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a command analysis process shown in FIG. 67 (S384), and returns to the process of step S381.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in step S384 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68 (S390), executes a ramp data determination process (S391), executes a sound data determination process (S392), and registers each determined data. (S393), and the command analysis process is terminated.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination process executed in step S390 of the command analysis process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not an initialization command has been received (S400). If it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes initialization command reception processing (S401) and ends the effect content determination processing. In the initialization command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as the initialization command is set. For example, the production state is restored or the production state is initialized based on the presence or absence of a setting change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S402). If it is determined that a medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a medal insertion command reception process (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a medal insertion sound is set based on whether or not a medal has been inserted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a start command has been received (S404). If it is determined that a start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a start command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 69 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as a start command is set. For example, during an AT game, if the internal winning combination is a push forward combination, effect data for informing the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous to the player is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received (S406). If it is determined that a reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (S407), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a reel rotation start sound is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a reel stop command has been received (S408). If it is determined that a reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a reel stop command reception process (S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as a reel stop command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a reel stop sound is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a lock command has been received (S410). If it is determined that a lock command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a lock command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 74 (S411), and ends the effect content determination process. In the lock command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as a lock command is set. For example, effect data for displaying an image corresponding to the type of reel action is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a lock command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S412). If it is determined that a winning action command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a winning action command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 75 (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. . In the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command, effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout number corresponding to the winning combination is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a bonus start command has been received (S414). If it is determined that a bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a bonus start command reception process (S415), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus start command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. In the present embodiment, the AT game is configured to be more advantageous than the BB game state. Therefore, based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command, the specific effect data It may be configured not to set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a bonus end command has been received (S416). If it is determined that a bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a bonus end command reception process (S417), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus end command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as the bonus end command is set. In the present embodiment, the AT game is configured to be relatively more advantageous than the BB game state. Therefore, based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command, the specific effect data It may be configured not to set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a no-operation command has been received (S418). If it is determined that a no-operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a no-operation command reception process (S419), and ends the effect content determination process.

  In the no-operation command reception process, the effect data may be changed based on information transmitted as a no-operation command. For example, if the effect data determined in the start command reception process is effect data requesting continuous hitting of the MAX bet button 15A, the MAX bet button 15A received as a no-operation command is in an on-edge state or off-edge The production data is changed based on the state information. On the other hand, if it is determined in S418 that a no-operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process.

<Processing when receiving a start command>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not an AT game is being played (S430). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not in an AT game (NO), it executes a normal game process (S443), which will be described later in the description of FIG. 72, and ends the start command reception process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the AT game is being played (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the “AT state” (S431). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the above-described AT preparation state.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is not “AT state” (is an AT preparation state) (NO), the sub CPU 81 sets navigation state transition data corresponding to the internal winning combination (S432). ), The process proceeds to step S438. Here, the navigation data for state transition during AT is data for informing the stop operation sequence in which seven medals are paid out when “push order small combination” is determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, when the strong chance lip is determined as an internal winning combination, this is data for informing the stop operation sequence so that the stop operation is not performed in the first left stop. Although illustration is omitted, as described above, a lottery for determining whether or not to notify the push-up order for the extra lock is executed, and when the lottery result is a win, the determined push-up order for the extra lock is determined. It can also be data for informing the stop operation order.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is the “AT state” (not the AT preparation state) (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the added state (S433). . If the sub CPU 81 determines that it is in the added state (YES), it executes processing in the added state (S434) described later in the description of FIG. 70, and proceeds to the processing of step S437.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S433 that it is not in the added state (NO), it is determined whether or not the effect gaming state is a pseudo-probability change state (“pseudo-probability change state 1” or “pseudo-probability change state 2”). Judgment is made (S435). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is not the pseudo-probability change state (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S437, and when it determines that the effect game state is the pseudo-probability change state (YES), FIG. The pseudo-probability changing state process (S436), which will be described later, is executed.

  Next, if the navigation data is not set, the sub CPU 81 sets the AT gaming navigation data corresponding to the internal winning combination (S437). Here, the navigation data during AT gaming is basically the same as the navigation data for state transition during AT, but BAR Lip 1, BAR Lip 2, or Fake BAR Lip is determined as an internal winning combination. In some cases, it may be data for notifying the reverse operation stop operation order (that is, the stop operation order in which the stop operation is performed in the first right stop).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is any of the bell lip 1 to 4 (S438). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not one of the bell lip 1 to 4 (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is any of the bell lip 1 to 4 (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the AT point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 35 and based on the current point value. The point addition lottery is executed (S439).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the result of the AT point addition lottery described above is addition (winning) (S440). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the result of the AT point addition lottery is not addition (winning) (maintenance (non-winning)) (NO), the sub-CPU 81 ends the start command reception process. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the result of the AT point addition lottery is addition (winning) (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the AT point counter (S441), and according to the AT point counter value. The effect data is set (S442), and the start command receiving process is terminated.

  Here, the effect data according to the AT point counter value is effect data for causing the arch cover 324 and the light emission display unit 325 to emit light according to the current AT point counter value. For example, the movable part 309 described above is controlled so that the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 can be visually recognized when moving from the initial position to the effect position when the normal game shifts to the AT game. The When the AT point counter value is 1, effect data for displaying the light emission display unit 325 in one step lighting is set. When the AT point counter value is 2, the light emission display unit 325 is displayed in two steps lighting display. Effect data is set, and when the AT point counter value is 3, effect data for causing the light emission display unit 325 to be displayed in three stages is set. When the AT point counter value is 4, the arch cover 324 is displayed. Production data for lighting display is set. As a result, the player can recognize the acquired AT points during the AT game.

  In addition, the AT points acquired during the AT game are cumulatively added. As will be described later in the description of FIG. 75, when the acquired AT points become 4, the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less. Even so, it will be possible to continue (continue) the AT game (that is, the right to continue the AT game will be granted), but even if the earned AT points are less than 4 points, this is won. The AT points can be carried over at least until the next AT game.

  Note that the movable part 309 described above is controlled so that the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 become invisible when the transition from the AT game to the normal game moves from the effect position to the initial position. The For this reason, in a normal game, it is impossible to recognize the AT point being carried over.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during AT game, lottery of AT points is performed, and the results are accumulated and stored. The stored AT points are a predetermined number of points (for example, 4 points). Then, since the AT game is configured to continue, the longer the AT game, the higher the possibility that the AT game will continue, so the expectation of the addition during the AT game will not become monotonous, The interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the stored AT points are less than a predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), the player is able to carry over the AT points until at least the next AT game. It is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after the end of the AT game, which contributes to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine.

  In addition, in normal games other than AT games, it is configured not to notify the AT points that have been carried over, so the player who starts the game from the normal game plays with a sense of expectation. It becomes possible to make it.

<Processing during addition>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the on-addition state process executed in step S434 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the added state management counter (S450). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the added state management counter is 10 or more (S451). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the added state management counter is 10 or more (YES), the added number state lottery process (S452) at the time of introducing the added state is executed, and the process during the added state is terminated. Here, in the added AT state addition lottery process, for example, the AT number addition value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined AT number addition value is added to the AT management difference sheet counter. Although illustration is omitted, when the AT number addition lottery process at the time of introduction of the added state is executed, a video is displayed to congratulate the transition to the added state or the continued added state. Production data is set.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the added state management counter is not 10 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the added point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 37 and determines the point added value based on the internal winning combination. Is determined (S453), and the determined point addition value is added to the added point counter (S454).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the added state point counter is 100 or more (S455). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter during the added state is 100 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the AT number addition lottery table during the added state shown in FIG. 36 and, based on the added state management counter value, The AT number addition value is determined (S456), the determined AT number addition value is added to the AT management difference sheet counter (S457), and the point counter in the added state is subtracted by 100 (S458), and is added to the added state management counter. An initial value (for example, 12) is set (S459), and the process in the added state is terminated.

  On the other hand, when determining that the added state point counter is not 100 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the added state management counter is 0 (S460). When determining that the added state management counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the added state point counter (S461), clears the added state (S462), and ends the added state process. To do. Further, when it is determined that the added state management counter is not 0 (NO), the process during the added state is also ended.

<Processing during pseudo-probability>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-probability changing state process executed in step S436 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the fall waiting flag is on (S470). Here, the fall waiting flag is a flag that is turned on in step S480, which will be described later, and in the control of the main CPU 51, "pseudo probability change state 1" or "pseudo probability change state 1" is set as the effect gaming state. However, in the control of the sub CPU 81, it is a flag for identifying that the pseudo-probability change state has already ended. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S473.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is on (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (S471). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether one of the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo probability variation state fall navigation data (S472) and ends the pseudo probability variation state processing. Here, the pseudo-accuracy state fall navigation data is a stop operation sequence in which the bell lip is won when the internal winning combination is one of the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4 (see FIG. 19). ).

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S471 that the internal winning combination does not include a bell lip (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S473. That is, even if the fall waiting flag is on, if the internal winning combination does not include a bell lip, the sub CPU 81 executes the pseudo game or in the process of step S473 described later. Add lottery of AT number.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes an AT number addition lottery process (S473) during the pseudo-probability changing state. In this pseudo-probability changing state AT number addition lottery process, regardless of whether or not the pseudo game is executed, for example, the AT number addition value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined AT number addition value is determined. Add to the AT management difference sheet counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo game is executed (S474). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo game is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S482.

  On the other hand, when determining that the pseudo game is executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change state 2” (S475). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is the “pseudo-probability changing state 2” (YES), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S482.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S475 that the effect gaming state is not “pseudo-probability change state 2” (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the fall waiting flag is on (S476). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the pseudo probability change state.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S476 that the fall waiting flag is not on (NO), the pseudo-probability change state management counter is decremented by 1 (S477), and then the pseudo-probability change state management counter is 0. It is determined whether or not (S478). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo-probability change state management counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S482.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo-probability change state management counter is 0 (YES), the sub-CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-probability change state end lottery table shown in FIG. The transition state is determined (S479). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the end of probability change, that is, whether or not the end of probability change is determined as the transition state (S480). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the end of probability variation has not been determined as the transition state (the probability variation continuation has been determined) (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S482.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S480 that the probability change end has been determined as the transition state (YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the fall waiting flag (S481).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (S482). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether one of the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination includes bell lip (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for maintaining the pseudo probability change state (S483), and ends the process during the pseudo probability change state. The sub CPU 81 also terminates the process during the pseudo-probability change state even when it is determined that the internal winning combination does not include a bell lip (NO). Here, the pseudo-change state maintaining navigation data notifies the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 19) in which the bell lip does not win when the internal winning combination is one of the normal lip 1-4 or the bell lip 1-4. It is data to do.

<In-game processing>
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the normal game process executed in step S443 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a confirmed combination (S490). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the internal winning combination is cherry lip, strong cherry lip, or strong bell. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is a confirmed combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S493. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not the final winning combination (NO), the normal game number counter is incremented by 1 (S491), and then whether or not the normal game number counter = the number of ceiling games is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the normal game has reached the above-described number of ceiling games (ceiling game number digestion). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter = the number of ceiling games (YES), it executes an AT entry process (S493), which will be described later in the description of FIG. 73, and proceeds to the process of step S499.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S492 that the normal game number counter is not equal to the ceiling game number (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal game number counter is 1 (S494). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the first game after the end of the AT game. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the mode suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 32 and determines the mode suggestion effect (for example, the mode suggestion) based on the current mode. The effect data corresponding to any one of effects 1 to 9 is determined (S495), and the process proceeds to step S499.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter is not 1 (NO), it subsequently determines whether the 1's place of the normal game number counter is 0 (S496). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the 1's place of the normal game number counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S499.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S496 that the 1st place of the normal game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 81 calculates the number of remaining games by the ceiling game number-normal game number counter (S497). With reference to the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 33, the remaining game number suggestion effect (for example, effect data corresponding to one of the mode suggestion effects 1 to 10) is determined based on the remaining game number (S498). ). In this embodiment, the remaining game number suggesting effect is executed for every 10 games in the normal game in this way.

  Next, if the production data is not set, that is, if the production data is not determined, the sub CPU 81 sets production data corresponding to the internal winning combination etc. (S499), and ends the normal game process.

<Processing at AT entry>
FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing AT entry processing that is executed in step S493 of the normal game processing shown in FIG. 72 and in step S525 of the lock command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets AT entry effect data (S510). Here, the AT entry time effect data is effect data for notifying the transition from the normal game to the AT game, and for performing control for moving the above-described movable part 309 from the initial position to the effect position. Production data.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets an AT game from the next game (S511) and adds 150 to the AT management difference number counter (S512).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes mode transition lottery, determines the next mode from the modes A to C (S513), and determines the next ceiling game number based on the determined mode (S514). ), The normal game number counter is cleared (S515), and the AT entry process is terminated.

  Note that the sub CPU 81 replaces the process of adding 150 to the AT management difference sheet counter (giving the above-mentioned basic continuation count) in the process of step S512 (for example, the values of a plurality of AT management difference sheet counters (for example, The value of the AT management difference counter to be added by lottery may be determined from among 100, 150, or 200), and the addition process may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the number of basic continuations to be given and diversify the number of continuations of AT games.

<Processing when receiving lock command>
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the lock command reception time process executed in step S411 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a special reel action is executed (S520). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not any of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is executed. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the special reel action is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the AT number addition value corresponding to the type of the special reel action to the AT management difference sheet counter (S521), and receives the lock command. End time processing. Here, for example, when the special reel action 1 is executed, the AT number addition value is 0, and the AT number is not substantially added, but when the special reel action 2 is executed, the AT number is increased. When the special reel action 3 is executed by adding 300 as the addition value to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter, 400 is added to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter when the special reel action 3 is executed. When action 4 is executed, 500 is added to the value of the AT management difference sheet counter as the AT number addition value.

  Note that the sub CPU 81 replaces the processing of adding the value of the AT management difference number counter corresponding to the type of the special reel action in the processing of step S521 (giving the number of additional continuations described above) with a plurality of AT management purposes. It is also possible to determine the value of the AT management difference sheet counter to be added by lottery from the value of the difference sheet counter (for example, 300, 400, 500, or 1000), and execute the addition process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of additional continuations to be given and diversify the number of continuations of AT games.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special reel action is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the reel action 9 or 10 is executed (S522). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel action 9 or 10 is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets an initial value (for example, 3) in the pseudo-probability change state management counter (S523), and ends the lock command reception process. To do.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S522 that the reel action 9 or 10 is not executed (NO), then, the sub CPU 81 determines whether any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is executed (S524). . If the sub CPU 81 determines that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is executed (YES), it executes the AT entry processing (S525) shown in FIG. 73 and ends the lock command reception processing. .

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S524 that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is not executed (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not a pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (S526). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes an AT number addition lottery based on the pseudo internal winning combination, and adds the lottery result to the AT management difference sheet counter. In step S527, the lock command reception process ends.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S526 that the pseudo internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the lock data is executed after all stops (S528). That is, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lock at the end of the game is executed due to the stop operation performed in the push-up order for the extra lock.

  If the sub-CPU 81 determines in step S528 that the lock data is to be executed after all stops (YES), the sub-CPU 81 executes the lock time AT number addition lottery process (S529) after the all stops, and performs the lock command reception process. finish. Even when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lock data is not executed after the complete stop (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the lock command reception process. In the after-stop lock AT number addition lottery process, the sub CPU 81 determines, for example, an AT number addition value by lottery (for example, determines any one of 100 to 500 as the AT number addition value), and determines the lottery result. Add to the AT management difference sheet counter. Note that the specific benefit given when the lock data is executed after all stops is not limited to this. For example, as a specific benefit, the above-described addition state may be shifted under the control of the sub CPU 81. For example, as a specific benefit, the main CPU 51 may control to shift to the above-described pseudo-probability change state and set a special value (for example, 10) in the pseudo-probability change state management counter.

<Process when receiving a winning action command>
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a winning action command reception process executed in step S413 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not an AT game is being played (S540). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT game is not being executed (NO), the winning operation command receiving process is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that an AT game is being played (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not it is in an added state (S541). If the sub CPU 81 determines that it is in the added state (YES), the winning operation command receiving process is terminated. In the present embodiment, in this way, in the added state, the subtraction process (see step S546 described later) of the AT management difference counter is not executed.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S541 that it is not in the added state (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the internal winning combination has won a prize other than the BAR lip and the left first stop (S542). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the BAR lip 1 or the BAR lip 2 is determined as the internal winning combination, and has won any one of the winning replays by performing the first stop operation except for the left reel 3L. Judge whether or not. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is a BAR lip and has won a prize other than the first stop at the left (YES), it sets an added state from the next game (S543), and sets an initial value ( For example, 12) is set (S544), and the process at the time of receiving a winning action command is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S542 that the internal winning combination has not won a prize other than the BAR lip and left first stop (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the small winning combination has been won. (S545). If the sub CPU 81 determines that no winning combination has been won (NO), the winning operation command reception process ends. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that a small role has been won (YES), the difference number calculated from the number of payouts (see FIGS. 14a and 14b) −the number of inserts (for example, 3) is used for AT management. Subtraction is made from the use difference number counter (S546). In this embodiment, the difference number management in the AT game is realized in this way.

  Note that, in step S545, the sub CPU 81 may determine whether or not any bell has been won instead of whether or not a small role has been won. Specifically, one of “middle left and right bells”, “middle right and left bells”, “right left and middle bells” and “right middle and left bells” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined whether or not any of the bells has been won, “7” is set as the number of payouts regardless of whether or not they are actually paid out, and the process of step S546 is executed. It is good as well. In other words, the AT management difference sheet counter may be a counter that is updated by winning the “push order small combination”. By configuring in this way, for example, in an AT game, between a player who has performed a stop operation while ignoring the notified stop operation sequence, and a player who has performed a stop operation in accordance with the notified stop operation sequence, Since there is a difference in the profits obtained, it is possible to increase the tension of the game in AT games and improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the sub CPU 81 may execute the process of step S546 by executing the same determination as in step S238 of the in-AT state management process shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S545, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a small role has been won, not whether or not a small role has been won, and if any of the bells has been won. The process of step S546 may be executed. In the present embodiment, in S239 following the above-described step S238, the AT game winning number counter is incremented by 1, and when the AT gaming winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (for example, 38), the external signal 1 is turned off. (See FIG. 53). That is, by configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the condition that the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 fluctuates (for example, from on to off) and the condition that the AT game in the sub CPU 51 ends. it can. In this case, it is desirable to synchronize the condition for starting the AT game in the sub CPU 51 with the condition for changing the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 (for example, turning from off to on).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT management difference sheet counter is 0 or less (S547). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT management difference sheet counter is not less than or equal to 0 (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process upon receiving a winning action command. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT management difference number counter is 0 or less (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the AT point counter is 4 or more (S548).

  If the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT point counter is 4 or more (YES), the AT management difference sheet counter is incremented by 150 (S549), and the AT point counter is decremented by 4 (S550). The process at the time of receiving the operation command is terminated. On the other hand, when determining that the AT point counter is not 4 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the normal game from the next game, sets the determined mode and the number of ceiling games (S551), and wins a prize. The process at the time of receiving the operation command is terminated. In this embodiment, the AT game is continued on the basis of the AT points in this way.

  The determination of whether or not the AT point counter is 4 or more is not limited to that executed at the end of the AT game. For example, in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69, a stock counter indicating that one set of AT games will continue based on the fact that the AT point counter has reached 4 (that is, the right to continue AT games). 1 is added, and at the end of the AT game, it is determined whether or not the stock counter is 1 or more. If the stock counter is 1 or more, the AT game may be controlled to continue for one set. Good. In this case, in place of or in addition to the effect data for lighting and displaying the arch cover 324 described above, effect data for notifying that one set of AT games will continue is set, and AT games are played during AT games. May be notified that one set continues.

[Other embodiments of pachislot machine]
In the present embodiment, special reel actions 1 to 4, reel actions 1 to 14, or pseudo games are adopted as reel effects (effects according to symbol variation modes), but the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, other embodiments can also be adopted as a reel effect (effect based on symbol variation). Next, with reference to FIG. 76 to FIG. 79, reel effects (effects based on symbol variation modes) according to other embodiments will be described. In the description of FIGS. 76 to 79, the description overlapping with the content already described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 75 is omitted.

<Lock lottery processing>
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42 in another embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes cherry lip A (S560). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether either a cherry lip or a strong cherry lip (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination does not include cherry lip A (NO), the lock lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination includes cherry lip A (YES), it sets a special reel action (S561), turns on the special control flag (S562), and ends the lock lottery process. To do. In step S561, the condition for setting the special reel action is not limited to the case where it is determined that the internal winning combination includes cherry lip A. For example, whether or not to execute the special reel action is simply determined. It is good also as lottery and determining based on this lottery result.

<Lock execution process at game start>
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in step S19 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42 in another embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a special reel action has been determined (S565). When the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action has not been determined (NO), the game start lock execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action has been determined (YES), it subsequently determines whether the left stop button is on (S565). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is pressed (pseudo stop operation) by the player and the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is on. If the main CPU 51 determines that the left stop button is not on (is off) (NO), the game start lock execution process is terminated. Here, for example, in the special reel action, each reel starts pseudo-rotation in the same manner as normal rotation by forward rotation (that is, at the same or substantially the same rotation speed as the normal rotation). When the timer value becomes 0, each reel starts the normal rotation as it is.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S566 that the left stop button is on (YES), the main CPU 51 sets an effect timer corresponding to the pseudo stop start position (S567) and ends the game start lock execution process. To do. Here, the pseudo stop start position indicates a symbol position when the left stop button 17L is operated during execution of the special reel action (for example, symbol position data positioned at the middle stage of the left reel 3L).

  In addition, setting the effect timer according to the pseudo stop start position means that the pseudo stop start position is the number of symbols in the middle of the left reel 3L from the position where the “cherry” symbol stops (design position data is 12 and 17). Indicates that the production timer is set according to whether the user is away. For example, when the value of the effect timer for one symbol is “17” (about 0.019 seconds), the position where the “cherry” symbol stops and the pseudo stop start position in the middle of the left reel 3L are one symbol. If separated, “17” (about 0.019 seconds) is set as the value of the production timer, and the position where the “cherry” symbol stops and the pseudo stop start position in the middle stage of the left reel 3L are for 14 symbols. If it is away, “238 (17 × 14)” (about 0.266 seconds) is set as the value of the effect timer. Here, assuming that the value of the pulse counter necessary for moving by one symbol (the symbol counter is incremented by 1) is “17”, that is, in the special reel action, A value corresponding to an integral multiple of the time required to move by one symbol is set according to how many symbols the pseudo stop start position is separated from the position where the “cherry” symbol stops.

  In other embodiments, the value of the effect timer is set according to how many symbols the pseudo stop start position is separated from the position where the “cherry” symbol stops. It is good also as setting the value of an effect timer according to lottery. Specifically, the same lottery value is assigned to the symbol position data “0” to “19” (for example, the lottery value “12” is assigned to each symbol position data, One symbol position data is determined by lottery with a probability of 256. Also, for the lottery value “16” which is a fraction of the lottery value when the lottery value “12” is assigned to each symbol position data, the symbol position data is again determined. The position data is re-botted.), The value of the effect timer according to the determined symbol position data (for example, as a result of lottery, the pseudo stop start position as seen from the symbol position corresponding to the determined symbol position data) Depending on how many symbols are separated from each other, the value of the effect timer that will end the execution of the lock at the start of the game may be set. Further, the lottery at the symbol position that will end the execution of the lock at the start of the game may be performed at the start operation.

  In the other embodiments, the left reel 3L and the left stop button 17L are described as examples. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the center is replaced with the left reel 3L and the left stop button 17L. The same processing may be executed on the reel 3C, the middle stop button 17R, the right reel 3L, and the right stop button 17R, or the same processing may be executed on all of them.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. In addition, since the process of step S570-S573 in FIG. 78 is the same process as the process of step S330-S333 in FIG. 56, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main CPU 51 determines whether or not the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (S574). If it is determined that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the input port check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the left stop button is on (S575). That is, the main CPU 51 turns on the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L when the player presses the left stop button 17L during execution of the special reel action, and at the end of the special reel action. Based on the fact that the pressing operation is continued, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L remains on. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left stop button is not on (is off) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the input port check process.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S575 that the left stop button is on (YES), the main CPU 51 requests the output of a special on-edge signal (S576) and ends the input port check process. Here, requesting the output of the special on-edge signal means that the on-edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is output in a pseudo manner even when the left stop button 3L is kept pressed. Or the process of turning the on-edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L off once and then turning it on again is executed.

  In the present embodiment, normally, after the processing of step S20 in FIG. 42, the operation of stopping each reel is permitted based on the fact that each reel has been rotated at a constant speed. In the processing, the execution of the reel stop control corresponding to the operated stop button is started based on the on-edge information being stored as the input data of the input port assigned to the stop switch 17S. On the other hand, in other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, the process of step S576 is performed, so that the stop switch 17S is assigned even if the stop button is kept pressed. On-edge information is stored as input data of the input port. Here, even if the stop button is kept pressed, the manner in which the on-edge information is stored as the input data of the input port assigned to the stop switch 17S is not limited to this. For example, at the timing when the stop operation to each reel is permitted, it is always monitored whether or not the stop switch 17S is on. If it is on, the reel stop control corresponding to the operated stop button is executed. It may be started. In this case, the processing of steps S574 to S576 is not necessary.

  As described above, in other embodiments, when a special reel action is executed, each reel starts pseudo rotation by forward rotation, and when a player performs a pseudo stop operation, a specific symbol position (for example, The effect timer is set based on the symbol position where the “cherry” symbol stops in the middle stage and the pseudo stop start position (for example, the symbol position located in the middle stage when the pseudo stop operation is performed). When the value of the production timer becomes 0, a reel stop request signal (for example, a special on-edge signal) is output even if the player keeps pressing the stop button, and the reel at a specific symbol position is output. Will stop.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the other embodiments, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed using the reel effect, so that the interest for the stop operation is markedly increased. It becomes possible to improve.

  In addition, the combination of symbols related to Cherry Lip A is “Cherry-ANY-ANY”, and the player can easily hold down the left stop button 17L during the special reel action. The “cherry” symbol can be stopped in the middle of the left reel 3L. That is, since it is possible to easily detect that a specific combination (for example, the above-described fixed combination) has been established, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination is cherry lip or strong cherry lip, even if the combination of symbols related to cherry lip A is not stopped, the combination of symbols related to other replays is always stopped and displayed. (See FIG. 17 and FIG. 19), the player will not suffer any particular disadvantage. Therefore, even if the “cherry” symbol can be easily stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 3L, there is no adjustment that harms the fairness of the game.

<Stop operation continuation suggestion effect>
FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating an example of a stop operation continuation suggesting effect according to another embodiment. Here, the stop operation continuation suggestion effect is, for example, a case where a special reel action is determined in the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49, and lock command data including that is generated, When the lock command data is stored in the communication data storage area and the lock command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in the communication data transmission process shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 79, for example, when a special reel action is executed, the sub CPU 81 performs control so that an image of “Keep pressing the left stop button!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Thereafter, if the left stop button 3L is pseudo-stopped and the effect timer reaches 0 with the left stop button 3L being pressed, the “cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L. .

  As described above, in the other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, a notification that the stop button should be continuously pressed based on the pseudo stop operation is performed. Based on this, it is possible to reliably enjoy an effect that can give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed. In addition, when the establishment of the specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed combination) is the execution condition of the special reel action, the player is notified that the specific combination (for example, the above-described fixed combination) has been formed. It can be enjoyed with certainty.

  As described above, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination (Internal lottery process), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping symbol variation and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means are stopped by the symbol variation stop control means. And profit granting means for granting profit according to the stopped symbol combination (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) Based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, the advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) controls the player to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. And notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the lamp group 21, the speakers 20L and 20R) for performing notification of a plurality of types of information to the player, and notification control for controlling notification performed by the notification means. Means (for example, a sub CPU 81), wherein the advantageous gaming state control means at least has played a predetermined number of games in a normal gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state (for example, in a normal game) , The number of ceiling games has been consumed) is set as the predetermined start condition, and the notification control means plays a specific number of games in the normal game state. Each time (for example, 10 games) is performed, based on the number of games (for example, the number of remaining games) up to the predetermined number of games, a plurality of specific notification data (for example, remaining game number suggesting effects 1 to 10) If the specific notification data is determined from the notification data, the specific notification data is determined by the notification means, and the specific notification data is determined by the notification control means. The specific notification data is determined at a different determination ratio for each range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games (for example, referring to the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 33) A game machine characterized in that presentation data corresponding to the suggestion presentation is determined).

  According to this gaming machine, in a normal game state (for example, a normal game), every time a specific number of games are played, a notification (for example, a remaining game number suggesting effect) corresponding to the specific notification data is executed. Thus, it is possible to add a new game property of estimating the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved and the decrease in the operation of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, as the number of games in the normal game state (for example, normal game) increases, notification (for example, remaining game number suggesting effect) corresponding to more specific notification data is executed. Therefore, a player who has a large number of games can more accurately grasp the number of remaining games, so that the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, in estimating the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), notification (for example, the number of remaining games) corresponding to one specific notification data In some cases, it can be inferred by the execution of the suggestion effect), or in some cases it can be inferred by the execution of the notification corresponding to the specific notification data a plurality of times (for example, the remaining game number suggestion effect), the notification according to the specific notification data It is possible to remarkably improve the interest of (for example, the remaining game number suggestion effect) itself.

  The plurality of specific notification data includes at least first specific notification data (for example, effect data corresponding to any of the remaining game number suggesting effects 1 to 3) and second specific notification data (for example, the remaining game). Effect data corresponding to the number suggesting effect 4), third specific notification data (for example, effect data corresponding to the remaining game number suggesting effect 5), and fourth specific notification data (for example, remaining game number suggesting effects 8 to 10). When the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is within a predetermined range (for example, the remaining number of games is within 240 games) Only the first specific notification data is determined with a predetermined probability, and the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range, and the first range (for example, the remaining The second specific notification data with a first probability (for example, a probability of 2000/32768) when the number of games is 101 to 240 games or the remaining number of games is 31 to 50 games). And determining the second range lower than the first probability when the second range (for example, the range of 51 to 100 remaining games or the range of 11 to 30 remaining games) is determined. The second specific notification data is determined with a probability (for example, a probability of 100/32768), and the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range, and the second range And determining the third specific notification data with the first probability, and determining the third specific notification data with the second probability when within the first range, The predetermined number of games A third probability that is lower than the first probability and higher than the second probability when the range of the number of games to reach is outside the predetermined range (for example, the remaining number of games is 241 games or more) The second specific notification data or the third specific notification data is determined with a probability of 300/32768 (for example, a probability of 300/32768), and the range of the number of games to reach the predetermined number of games is any range. , The predetermined probability and a fourth probability higher than the first probability (eg, a probability of 10,000 / 32768, a probability of 9300/32768, a probability of 9000/32768, a probability of 10522/32768, or 10524/32768 The fourth specific notification data is determined with a probability).

  According to this gaming machine, the determination of specific notification data is complicated, thereby preventing monotonousness in estimating the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming). However, it is possible to make the game more diverse.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a profit corresponding to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are given. For example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51 and a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying the player of information. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a player's start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16), and the start operation. Thus, symbol variation start control means for starting symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control by the main CPU 51). Processing) and a symbol variation stop control means (for example, main) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R). (Reel stop control process and reel control process by the CPU 51) and that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, “strong chance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and “special lip A1-6” or “special lip B” The game state is changed from the normal game state (for example, “normal game state”) to the first game state (for example, “main CZ state 1”) based on any combination of symbols of In the first game state, when a specific transition condition is satisfied during a specific number of games (for example, during 8 games), the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game. When a transition is made to a state (for example, “AT state”) and the specific transition condition is not satisfied, a gaming state transition control means (the gaming state transition control means for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state to the normal gaming state) For example, in the state management process by the main CPU 51, and in the first gaming state, main effect means (for example, effects by reel actions 1 to 8) in accordance with the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means (for example, effects by reel actions 1 to 8) Reel effect control processing by the main CPU 51) and lock execution means for executing a lock that invalidates the game operation by the player in accordance with the effect by the symbol variation mode performed by the main effect means in the first gaming state ( For example, main control means (for example, the main CPU 51) including When the game state is controlled to the second game state by the game state transition control unit, the sub effect unit (for example, by the sub CPU 81) that notifies the information of an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium by the notification unit. Sub-control means (for example, sub-CPU 81) including a start command reception process, and the specific transition condition is that an effect in a specific symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means (for example, reel action) 5 to 8 are executed).

  According to this gaming machine, by giving a privilege (for example, shifting to an AT game) according to the type of effect (for example, reel action) by the symbol variation mode executed at the time of performing the lock, The expectation in the chance zone state (for example, “main CZ state 1”) that is easily executed can be significantly improved.

  The main effect means determines the symbol variation mode based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means for each game in the first gaming state (for example, during normal game by the main CPU 51) The reel action in the lottery process is determined), and the gaming state transition control means is a case where the specific symbol variation mode (for example, reel actions 5 to 8) is not determined by the main effect means, and the predetermined symbol variation When the mode (for example, reel action 3 or 4) is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the high probability first gaming state (for example, "main CZ state 2"), and the main effect means In one gaming state, the specific symbol variation mode is determined with a higher probability than in the first gaming state (for example, a main CZ state reel by the main CPU 51). Gaming machine, characterized in that the lottery) by transfection lottery table.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the aspect of the design variation mode (for example, reel action), and to produce the design variation mode to which a privilege is given ( For example, even if the reel actions 5 to 8) at which the AT game is started are not determined, in the chance zone state (for example, “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2”) in which the lock is easily executed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in expectation.

  In addition, the effect by the symbol variation mode changes the symbol step by step in a mode (for example, reverse rotation) different from the symbol variation started by the symbol variation start control means (for example, each reel has one stage to The stage in which the symbol is changed is different from the stage in which the specific symbol variation mode is produced and the stage in which the predetermined symbol variation mode is performed (for example, in reel actions 5 and 7, there are five stages and reels). (6) In each of the actions 6 and 8, the reels are changed in 6 steps, while in the reel action 3, each reel is changed in 3 steps, and in the reel action 4, each reel is changed in 4 steps.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to gradually improve the player's expectation when an effect (for example, reel action) based on the symbol variation mode is executed, and intuitively determine the degree of advantage to the player. Can be grasped.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination (Internal lottery process), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping symbol variation and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means are stopped by the symbol variation stop control means. And profit granting means for granting profit according to the stopped symbol combination (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) Based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, the advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) controls the player to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. And, in the advantageous gaming state, a point based on a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, one of bell lip 1 to 4) determined by the internal winning combination determining means Point number giving means for giving a number (for example, processing upon reception of a start command by the sub CPU 81), point number storage means (for example, a point counter during AT) for accumulating the number of points given by the point number giving means, Based on the fact that the number of points stored by the point number storage means has become a predetermined number (eg, “4”), A continuation right granting unit that grants the right to continue the gaming state (for example, the process of S549 in the process of receiving a winning action command under the control of the sub CPU 81) and the right to continue the advantageous gaming state by the continuation right granting unit are granted. A point number updating means for subtracting the predetermined number from the number of points stored by the point number storage means (for example, the processing of S550 in the process of receiving a winning action command under the control of the sub CPU 81); The advantageous gaming state control means continues the advantageous gaming state by the continuation right granting means when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied (for example, when the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less). If the right to be played is granted, the advantageous game letter until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied again. When the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the number of points less than the predetermined number is stored, the advantageous game state control means at least the next time A gaming machine characterized in that the stored number of points is carried over until controlled to an advantageous gaming state.

  According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, any one of the bell lip 1 to 4) is determined during an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), points (for example, points during AT) are determined. Since the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) is continued when the number of points awarded and stored reaches a predetermined number of points (for example, 4 points), the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) is in progress. The interest of the game can be improved without becoming monotonous.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even when the stored points (for example, points during AT) are less than a predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), the points are at least the next advantageous gaming state. Since it is configured to carry over to (for example, an AT game), it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game immediately after the advantageous gaming state ends, which contributes to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine. Become.

  Further, in the advantageous gaming state, it further comprises point number notifying means (for example, an arch cover 324 and a light emitting display unit 325 controlled by the sub CPU 81) for notifying the number of points stored in the point number storing means, The point number notifying means does not notify the point number in a gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state (for example, normal game) when the point number is carried over by the point number storing means (for example, sub A game machine in which the movable part 309 is moved from the effect position to the initial position under the control of the CPU 81).

  According to this gaming machine, in a gaming state (for example, a normal game) other than an advantageous gaming state (for example, an AT game), a point carried over (for example, an AT point) is not notified. It is possible for a player who starts a game from a normal game to play a game with a sense of expectation.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols, and normal game control means (for example, main CPU 51 and Sub CPU 81), normal game operation detecting means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting a normal game operation by the player in the normal game, and pseudo game control for controlling the progress of the pseudo game Means (for example, main CPU 51 and sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detecting means for detecting a pseudo game operation by a player in the pseudo game, for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S), and predetermined start conditions Based on the establishment of the game, for a predetermined number of games, Advantageous game state control means (for example, sub-CPU 81) for controlling to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player, and the normal game operation detecting means is at least a start operation (for example, as the normal game operation) , An operation to the start lever 16) and a stop operation (for example, an operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the normal game control means is based on the detection of the start operation. The symbol variation starting means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation are detected. Based on the above, symbol variation stopping means (for example, a reel stop control process by the main CPU 51 and a main CPU 51) When the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the reel control processing) and the symbol change stopping means, the profit giving means (for example, by the main CPU 51) grants a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols. A medal payout process) and, in the advantageous gaming state, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, whether or not to add the predetermined number of games is determined as a normal game additional determining unit (for example, , The process of S474 in the process during the pseudo-probability change state under the control of the sub CPU 81), and in the advantageous gaming state, the normal Lock determination means (for example, lottery processing during pseudo-probability changing state by the main CPU 51) for determining whether or not to execute a lock that invalidates the gaming operation for a predetermined period, and execution of the lock is determined by the lock determination means The lock execution means for executing the lock (for example, the game start lock execution processing by the main CPU 51), and the pseudo game operation detection means is executed by the lock execution means. The pseudo game operation (for example, operation on the MAX bet button 15A, operation on the start lever 16, operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the pseudo game control means , Determining the number of pseudo games to determine the number of pseudo games when the lock is executed once by the lock execution means And the pseudo game operation is performed when the pseudo game number determined by the pseudo game number determining means is not 0 (for example, the pseudo game number counter is not 0). And a pseudo internal winning combination determining means for determining a pseudo internal winning combination (for example, a lock execution process at the start of the game by the main CPU 51), and the pseudo internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state. Based on the pseudo internal winning combination determined by the above, a pseudo game extra decision means for deciding whether or not to add the predetermined number of games (for example, the processing of S527 in the lock command reception process under the control of the sub CPU 81); The pseudo game number determination means determines a plurality of pseudo game times (for example, a pseudo game number lottery). Based on Buru, gaming machine, which is a pseudo-game number determination) possible.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols, and normal game control means (for example, main CPU 51 and Sub CPU 81), normal game operation detecting means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting a normal game operation by the player in the normal game, and pseudo game control for controlling the progress of the pseudo game Means (for example, main CPU 51 and sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detecting means for detecting a pseudo game operation by a player in the pseudo game, for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S), and predetermined start conditions Based on the establishment of the game, for a predetermined number of games, Advantageous game state control means (for example, sub-CPU 81) for controlling to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player, and the normal game operation detecting means is at least a start operation (for example, as the normal game operation) , An operation to the start lever 16) and a stop operation (for example, an operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the normal game control means is based on the detection of the start operation. The symbol variation starting means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation are detected. Based on the above, symbol variation stopping means (for example, a reel stop control process by the main CPU 51 and a main CPU 51) When the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the reel control processing) and the symbol change stopping means, the profit giving means (for example, by the main CPU 51) grants a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols. A medal payout process) and, in the advantageous gaming state, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, whether or not to add the predetermined number of games is determined as a normal game additional determining unit (for example, , The process of S474 in the process during the pseudo-probability change state under the control of the sub CPU 81), and in the advantageous gaming state, the normal Lock determination means (for example, lottery processing during pseudo-probability changing state by the main CPU 51) for determining whether or not to execute a lock that invalidates the gaming operation for a predetermined period, and execution of the lock is determined by the lock determination means The lock execution means for executing the lock (for example, the game start lock execution processing by the main CPU 51), and the pseudo game operation detection means is executed by the lock execution means. The pseudo game operation (for example, operation on the MAX bet button 15A, operation on the start lever 16, operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the pseudo game control means , Determining the number of pseudo games to determine the number of pseudo games when the lock is executed once by the lock execution means And the pseudo game operation is performed when the pseudo game count determined by the pseudo game count determining means is not 0 (eg, the pseudo game count counter is not 0). And a pseudo internal winning combination determining means for determining a pseudo internal winning combination (for example, a lock execution process at the start of the game by the main CPU 51), and the pseudo internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state. Based on the pseudo internal winning combination determined by the above, a pseudo game extra decision means for deciding whether or not to add the predetermined number of games (for example, the processing of S527 in the lock command reception process under the control of the sub CPU 81); , The first mode (for example, “pseudo-probability change state 1”) and the pseudo game relative to the first mode. The second mode (for example, “pseudo-probability change state 2”) in which the number of pseudo games determined by the number determining means is increased is based on a predetermined transition condition (for example, whether or not a high-precision transition lottery has been won). Mode transition means for making transitions, and the pseudo game number determination means always determines a plurality of times of pseudo game when the mode transition means has shifted to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by

  The pseudo game operation detecting means detects at least a pseudo start operation (for example, an operation to the start lever 16) and a pseudo stop operation (for example, an operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R) as the pseudo game operation. The pseudo internal winning combination determining means determines a pseudo internal winning combination based on the detection of the pseudo start operation, and the pseudo game control means determines that the pseudo operation is detected. Based on this, a pseudo symbol variation starting means (for example, a pseudo game process and a reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) for artificially starting a symbol change displayed on the symbol display means, and the pseudo stop operation are detected. On the basis of this, the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the pseudo internal symbol combination determined by the pseudo internal symbol combination determining unit Pseudo-pseudo symbol variation stopping means for stopping (e.g., pseudo-game process and the reel effect control process of the main CPU 51) a gaming machine, characterized in that a, further comprising a.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, during the pseudo-probability change state, not only the number of advantageous game states based on the internal winning combination (for example, the number of ATs) is added, but also the advantageous gaming state based on the pseudo internal winning combination Since an extra lottery opportunity will be given for the number of times (for example, the number of ATs), it is possible to expect multiple extra lotteries during one unit game, and to improve the interest of the game related to the addition Can do.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, for example, by using a pseudo game, a lottery can be generated a plurality of times in a time shorter than a specified time defined in the gaming machine, for example, a pseudo probability change state, for example It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the added lottery state which is advantageous to the player.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, in the second mode (for example, “pseudo-probability change state 2”), when a pseudo game is executed, the number of times of the pseudo game is always multiple times (for example, two times or more). Since it is determined, the number of advantageous gaming states based on the pseudo internal winning combination (for example, the number of ATs) can be added and the chance of lottery can be enjoyed a plurality of times. The added lottery state can be diversified.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination (Internal lottery process), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping symbol variation and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means are stopped by the symbol variation stop control means. And profit granting means for granting profit according to the stopped symbol combination (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) An advantageous gaming state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling to an advantageous gaming state (for example, an AT game) advantageous for a player for a predetermined number of games based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition; In the advantageous gaming state, a game number management means for managing the predetermined number of games (for example, management of an AT management difference counter by the sub CPU 81), and a specific start condition is established in the advantageous gaming state ( For example, “BAR lip 1” or “BAR lip 2” is determined as an internal winning combination, and a first stop operation is performed for a part other than the left reel 3L, so that one of the winning replays is won and the added state is 2 Until the specific end condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining 10 games are digested or the added state continues) An added game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) that controls an added game state (for example, an added state), which is a game state in which a predetermined number of games are added, and the game number management means has the added game state In step S541, the predetermined game number is not updated (for example, the process of S541 in the process of receiving a winning action command under the control of the sub CPU 81), and the additional game state control means Until the end condition is satisfied, the number of points determined by lottery for each game is determined (for example, processing during the added state by the sub CPU 81), and the number of points determined by the number of points determination unit is cumulatively stored. Point number storage means (for example, a point counter in an added state), and the point number storage means When a predetermined number (for example, “100”) or more points is stored, an additional game number determination means for determining the number of additional games to be added to the predetermined number of games (for example, processing in the added state by the sub CPU 81) ) And the number of points more than the predetermined number stored by the point number storage means, and when the specific end condition is satisfied, until the specific end condition is satisfied again, the extra game When the number of points exceeding the predetermined number is stored by the added gaming state continuation means (for example, processing during the added state by the sub CPU 81) for continuing the state and the point number storage means, the specific end condition is When established, in the added gaming state continued by the added gaming state continuation means, the amount exceeding the predetermined number Gaming machine which comprises a number of points carryover means carried over Into number (e.g., the processing of S458 in the plus state processing by the control of the sub CPU 81), a.

  According to this gaming machine, the added gaming state (for example, the added state) functions as a state for increasing the number of advantageous gaming states (for example, the number of ATs), and also functions for example for increasing the number of medals. Therefore, even if it is not possible to increase the number of advantageous gaming states in the added gaming state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by allowing the player to surely enjoy the benefit of an increase in medals. it can. In addition, when the added state continues, since the points to be cumulatively added during the added state (for example, points during the added state) can be carried over, there is no waste in the lottery result in the added state, The expectation of lottery during the added state can be further improved.

  Further, the specific end condition is that the point number storage means stores the number of points equal to or greater than the predetermined number, or the point number storage means does not store the number of points equal to or greater than the predetermined number. The additional game number determination means is the number of times the game in which the number of points more than the predetermined number is stored by the point number storage means in the additional game state. A game machine characterized by determining the number of extra games based on whether the game is an extra game (for example, an extra state management counter value).

  According to this gaming machine, in the added game state (for example, the added state), it is possible to prevent the added lottery from becoming monotonous, and to maintain the interest of the game even when repeatedly controlled to the added game state. Can do.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a profit corresponding to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are given. For example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51 and a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying the player of information. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a player's start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16), and the start operation. Thus, symbol variation start control means for starting symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control by the main CPU 51). Processing) and a symbol variation stop control means (for example, main) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R). A reel stop control process and a reel control process by the CPU 51) and a specific internal winning combination (for example, "cherry lip", "strong cherry lip" or "strong bell") is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. On the basis of this, the advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) for shifting the game state from the next game to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player from the normal game state (for example, normal game), The specific internal winning combination includes a first specific internal winning combination (eg, “strong cherry lip”) and a second specific internal winning combination (eg, “cherry” And the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and when the internal winning combination determining means determines the second specific internal winning combination. In this case, when the result of the predetermined lottery is a win (for example, when any of the special reel actions 2 to 4 is determined), the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game When the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, for example, the result of the predetermined lottery is not In case of winning (for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined), the effect (for example, the special reel action 1) by the second symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game. And the basic continuation in the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, reel effect control processing by the main CPU 51). A basic continuation number giving means (for example, AT entry processing by the sub CPU 81) for adding the number of times (for example, adding 150 to the AT management difference number counter) and the main effect means according to the first symbol variation mode A gaming machine comprising: an additional continuation number giving means (for example, a process at the time of receiving a lock command by the sub CPU 81) for giving an additional continuation number in the advantageous gaming state based on the performance.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a profit corresponding to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are given. For example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51 and a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying the player of information. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a player's start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16), and the start operation. Thus, symbol variation start control means for starting symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control by the main CPU 51). Processing) and a symbol variation stop control means (for example, main) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R). A reel stop control process and a reel control process by the CPU 51) and a specific internal winning combination (for example, "cherry lip", "strong cherry lip" or "strong bell") is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. On the basis of this, the advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) for shifting the game state from the next game to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player from the normal game state (for example, normal game), The specific internal winning combination includes a first specific internal winning combination (eg, “strong cherry lip”) and a second specific internal winning combination (eg, “cherry” And the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and when the internal winning combination determining means determines the second specific internal winning combination. In this case, when the result of the predetermined lottery is a win (for example, when any of the special reel actions 2 to 4 is determined), the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game When the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, for example, the result of the predetermined lottery is not In case of winning (for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined), the effect (for example, the special reel action 1) by the second symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game. The main effect means (for example, reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) and the main effect means produce the effect by the first symbol variation mode or the effect by the second symbol variation mode. Based on the basic continuation number in the advantageous gaming state (for example, adding 150, 300, 400 or 500 to the AT management difference number counter) (for example, the sub CPU 81), And additional continuation number giving means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for giving the additional continuation number in the advantageous gaming state based on an effect produced by the first symbol variation mode by the issuing means. The number-of-times giving means gives a right to continue the advantageous gaming state.

  According to this gaming machine, the winning of the winning combination is not limited to merely generating an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), but depends on the symbol variation mode executed in the next game based on the winning of the determined winning combination. When an effect (for example, special reel action) is performed and an effect (for example, any one of special reel actions 2 to 4) according to the first symbol variation mode is performed, the additional continuation number added to the basic continuation number Therefore, the expectation can be improved not only in the game won or won in the winning combination but also in the next game.

  In addition, the symbol variation stop control unit is configured to perform the stop operation at a predetermined timing when the first specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining unit (for example, each reel And when the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing. The game machine is characterized in that the variation of symbols is stopped so that at least a part of symbols constituting the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means is different.

  According to this gaming machine, a player who wants to quickly recognize the type of a decisive role quickly depends on the symbol variation mode by pressing on each reel at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing to stop and display the “BAR” symbol). The type can be recognized before the performance is performed. On the other hand, the player who wants to recognize whether the addition is successful due to the effect by the symbol variation mode (that is, whether the additional continuation number is given) dares to continue the expectation by not performing the above-mentioned intention. You can play games. That is, since it is possible to notify whether or not the addition is successful depending on the notification form and timing desired by the player, it is possible to perform notification according to the player's preference regarding the notification of the addition.

  Further, the basic continuation number giving means determines and assigns one basic continuation number among the plurality of basic continuation numbers, and the additional continuation number giving means is one of the plurality of additional continuation times. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of additional continuations is determined and given.

  According to this gaming machine, the basic continuation number and the additional continuation number to be given can be varied, and the number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) can be diversified.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a profit corresponding to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are given. For example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51 and a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying the player of information. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a player's start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16), and the start operation. Thus, symbol variation start control means for starting symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control by the main CPU 51). Processing) and a symbol variation stop control means (for example, main) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R). And a specific internal winning combination (for example, “strong chance lip”) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation is performed in a specific order (for example, 1st stop on the left) and a symbol combination specific to the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means (for example, any combination of symbols of “Special Lip A1-6” or “Special Lip B”) The game state is shifted from the normal game state (for example, “the normal game state”) to the first game state (for example, “the main CZ state 1”) based on the fact that the game is stopped In the first gaming state, when a specific transition condition is satisfied during a specific number of games (for example, during eight games), the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (for example, If the specific transition condition is not satisfied, the game state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 51) shifts the gaming state from the first gaming state to the normal gaming state. State management processing) and main effect means (for example, reel by the main CPU 51) for performing effects (for example, effects by reel actions 1 to 8) according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the first gaming state. Effect control processing) and in the first gaming state, the game operation by the player is invalidated according to the effect by the symbol variation mode performed by the main effect means. A specific lock execution means for executing a specific lock (for example, a game execution lock execution process by the main CPU 51) and the internal winning combination determination means determine the specific internal winning combination, and the stop operation is predetermined. In accordance with the order of the symbols (for example, the push-up order for the extra lock), and based on the fact that a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “middle stage replay”) is stopped on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means. Main control means including predetermined lock execution means (for example, lock end processing at game end by the main CPU 51) for executing a predetermined lock (for example, lock based on lock data after all stops) that invalidates the game operation by the player (For example, the main CPU 51) and the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state by the gaming state transition control means Sub-control means (for example, sub CPU 81) including sub-effect means (for example, processing at the time of start command reception by the sub CPU 81) for notifying information of an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium by the notification means, The specific transition condition is that an effect according to a specific symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect unit (for example, reel actions 5 to 8 are executed), and the predetermined lock execution unit performs the predetermined lock. Is executed, the specific profit that gives the player a specific profit (for example, determination of the AT number addition value, transition to the pseudo-probability change state) different from the profit for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state A gaming machine further comprising grant means (for example, a sub CPU 81 and a main CPU 51).

  In addition, in the second gaming state, when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock execution unit, the specific profit granting unit receives the information on the stop operation by the sub-production unit as the specific profit. A gaming machine characterized by providing a benefit of increasing the number of times of notification (for example, determination of an AT number addition value under the control of the sub CPU 81).

  The specific profit granting means may change the gaming state from the second gaming state to the third gaming state as the specific profit when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock executing means in the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by providing a profit for shifting to a gaming state (for example, a transition to an effect gaming state “pseudo-probability changing state” under the control of the main CPU 51).

  According to this gaming machine, in the chance zone state (for example, “main CZ state 1”) in which the lock is easy to be executed, depending on the type of effect (for example, reel action) by the symbol variation mode executed when the lock is executed. By shifting to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming), the expectation can be remarkably improved.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when the transition to the chance zone state is not appropriate (for example, during an AT game or during AT preparation), a specific internal winning combination (for example, an opportunity for transition to the chance zone state) If you win the “Strong Chance Lip”), you will not shift to the chance zone state to prevent the contents of the game from becoming obscure and give different profits to win certain internal winning roles You can enjoy the benefits.

  A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) that variably display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a reel normal control means that normally controls the plurality of reels in order to advance the game (for example, normal by the main CPU 51) Reel control process), a reel effect determining means (for example, a lock lottery process performed by the main CPU 51) for determining the effect type according to the symbol variation mode of the plurality of reels when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the symbols of the plurality of reels Reel effect control means (for example, reel effect control processing by the main CPU 51) for controlling an effect (for example, reel action) according to a variation mode, wherein the reel effect control means determines the reel effect determination. Depending on the type of effect determined by the means, excitation output selection data corresponds to each of the plurality of reels. Reel effect selection data determining means for determining the selected reel effect selection data (for example, the process of S276 in the reel effect control process under the control of the main CPU 51) and the reel determined by the reel effect selection data determining means. Indicates that the type of excitation output table in which the rotation direction and the amount of rotation of the reel are determined, or at least the effect symbol position that is the symbol position for starting the effect on the reel should be adjusted based on the effect selection data. Excitation output selection data determining means for determining the type of symbol position adjustment data as excitation output selection data (for example, the process of S277 in the reel effect control process under the control of the main CPU 51) and the excitation output selection data determining means The symbol position adjustment data as the excitation output selection data And the effect symbol position adjustment means (for example, reel effect adjustment output processing by the main CPU 51) that adjusts the effect symbol position when determined, the effect symbol position adjustment means includes the symbol position adjustment data. The excitation output table is selected in accordance with the type of the effect and the effect symbol position (for example, the process of S294, the process of S297, the process of S300, and the process of S308 in the reel effect adjustment output process under the control of the main CPU 51 are executed. The game machine is characterized in that the effect symbol position is adjusted.

  According to this gaming machine, when an excitation output table is determined as excitation output selection data, excitation output control is performed using the excitation output table, and symbol position adjustment data is determined as excitation output selection data. For example, the excitation output table corresponding to the type of symbol position adjustment data and the effect symbol position is selected, and excitation output control is performed using the selected excitation output table. Since the symbol position of the reel can be adjusted only when it is desired to produce an effect based on the reel's symbol variation mode with all the symbols (for example, “Red 7” symbol) aligned, the production starts based on the reel's symbol variation mode Even if there is a deviation in the symbol position of the reel during the presentation in the front or in the reel symbol variation mode, the deviation is adjusted without increasing the control burden. Te, it is possible to enjoy the effects by symbol variation aspect of intended reels to the player.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination (Internal lottery process), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping symbol variation and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means are stopped by the symbol variation stop control means. And profit granting means for granting profit according to the stopped symbol combination (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) Based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, the advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) controls the player to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. And controlling the start and end of the output of a first external signal (for example, external signal 2) indicating that the advantageous gaming state is controlled by the advantageous gaming state control means, and the advantageous gaming state control means. External signal output control means (for example, external signal output management processing by the main CPU 51) for controlling the start and end of the output of a second external signal (for example, external signal 1) indicating that the advantageous gaming state has continued; And the external signal output control means is based on the fact that a predetermined output start condition is satisfied (for example, the number-of-wins counter in a normal game is 3). And starting the output of the first external signal, and based on the fact that only the first external signal is output in a unit game different from the unit game that started the output of the first external signal. When the output of the second external signal is started and the first external signal and the second external signal are output, a specific output end condition is satisfied (for example, winning in AT game) Only when the output of the second external signal is terminated and the first external signal and the second external signal are output, the predetermined counter is A gaming machine characterized in that the output of the first external signal and the second external signal is ended based on the fact that an output end condition is satisfied (for example, an AT end counter becomes 2).

  According to this gaming machine, the first external signal (for example, the external signal 2) indicating that it has been controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) and the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) have continued. Since the second external signal (for example, the external signal 1) is output, the number of initial hits and the number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is highly interested are appropriately displayed by an external display or the like. be able to.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the first external signal (for example, the external signal 2) indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) and the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) are continued. Since the second external signal (for example, the external signal 1) indicating that it has been output is output at a different timing with a simple configuration, the control burden on the external display side can be reduced, and a communication error, etc. Can also be reduced.

  Further, the predetermined output start condition is a condition that the establishment of the predetermined output start condition (for example, the start of an AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81) arrives later, and the specific output end condition is the predetermined output condition The game machine is characterized in that the establishment thereof comes later than the end condition (for example, the end of the AT game by the control of the sub CPU 81).

  According to this gaming machine, the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) starts and ends by notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) controlled by the sub-control circuit rather than displaying by an external display or the like. Since it is possible to promptly notify the player by notification, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player who is playing the game.

  Further, a difference number management means (for example, an AT management difference number counter) for managing the difference number in the advantageous gaming state, and a winning number management means (for example, AT) for managing the number of winnings of the specific small role in the advantageous gaming state. And the predetermined end condition is that the difference number managed by the difference number management means is a predetermined number (for example, 0 or less), and the specific output An ending condition is that the number of winnings managed by the winning number managing means is a predetermined number (for example, 38 times).

  According to this gaming machine, in particular, the number of continuations (1 set) of AT games can be appropriately displayed with a simple configuration.

  Based on symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R) and a player's start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16) that displays a plurality of symbols in multiple columns. An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and a symbol variation start control for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation. Based on the means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), the symbols displayed on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the variation of the symbol, and the symbol variation Profit granting means (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) for granting profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols when the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the stop control means. When the stop operation is performed in the first stop operation sequence (for example, “middle left and right”), the internal symbol combination is a combination of the first symbols (for example, 7 right-up correct push order) Is displayed on the symbol display means, and the stop operation is performed in the second stop operation sequence (for example, “Right / Left / Middle”). A second symbol combination (for example, right middle left bell B) that will be displayed on the symbol display means, the combination of the second symbol (for example, 7 middle correct push order) and the stop The operations are performed in the first stop operation sequence. In this case, a third internal symbol combination (for example, the middle left / right bell C), which is displayed on the symbol display means, is a combination of the third symbols (for example, the lower 7 correct push order) and the stop operation. However, when the second stop operation sequence is performed, a fourth internal winning combination (for example, right and left middle bell C) that the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means, The internal winning combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination and the second internal winning combination as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, coefficient “750”), and 3 internal winning combinations and the fourth internal winning combination are determined as internal winning combinations with a second probability lower than the first probability (for example, coefficient “250”), and the profit granting means The combination of the first symbol, the combination of the second symbol, and the combination of the third symbol A gaming machine characterized by giving a predetermined profit (for example, paying out 7 medals) which is the same profit when displayed on the symbol display means.

  In addition, the first internal winning combination is performed at the timing of the stop operation when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation sequence (for example, “middle right”) different from the first stop operation sequence. Accordingly, one of the combinations of the plurality of fourth symbols (for example, one correct answer at the pressed position) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the second internal winning combination is When the stop operation is performed in a stop operation sequence different from the second stop operation sequence (for example, “middle left and right”), a plurality of the fourth symbols are arranged according to the timing of the stop operation. Of the combinations (for example, one correct answer at the pressed position) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the third internal winning combination is the stop operation of the first winning combination. The stop operation order is different from the stop operation order. In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, any of the combinations of the fourth symbols (for example, one unquestioned piece) is an internal winning combination that will be displayed on the symbol display means, When the stop operation is performed in a stop operation sequence different from the second stop operation sequence, the fourth internal winning combination is a plurality of the fourth symbols regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Any combination (for example, one unquestioned) is an internal winning combination that is displayed on the symbol display means, and the profit granting means is that the fourth symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means. When displayed, the gaming machine is provided with a specific profit (for example, payout of one medal) less than the predetermined profit.

  According to this gaming machine, even when a plurality of push order small combinations are defined, it is possible to prevent the outcome (the combination of displayed symbols) from becoming monotonous when the stop operation order is correct. .

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, even when a plurality of push order small combinations are defined, the number of internal winning combinations is reduced, thereby reducing the data capacity and reducing the control burden of the internal lottery process. be able to.

  Also, according to this gaming machine, even when a plurality of push order small combinations are defined, it is easy to assign a desired lottery value evenly by reducing the number of internal winning combinations. This also contributes to the ease of design and design.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and a start operation detection means (for example, a start switch) that detects a start operation by the player 16S), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation by the player, and an internal winning combination determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The symbol variation that starts the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on the winning operation determining unit (for example, internal lottery processing by the main CPU 51) and the start operation detecting unit detecting the start operation. Start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation detection means The symbol variation stop control for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means within a predetermined maximum number of sliding symbols (for example, four symbols) based on the detection of the stop operation. Means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and that a predetermined condition has been established (for example, either cherry lip or strong cherry lip is determined as an internal winning combination) Based on the main effect means (for example, the main CPU 51) that performs the effect (for example, special reel action) according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means, and the effect according to the symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect unit. Sometimes, a lock starting means (for example, main CPU 51) for starting a lock for invalidating a game operation by the player, and the lock start Based on the fact that the lock is started by the stage and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the lock period determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. And a lock ending means (for example, the main CPU 51) for ending the lock based on the lapse of the lock period determined by the lock period determining means. The variable stop control unit is configured to detect the stop operation by the stop operation detection unit when the lock period is determined by the lock period determination unit until the lock is ended by the lock end unit. Even if the lock is ended by the lock end means (for example, step of FIG. 78). On the basis of the fact that the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means based on the fact that the special control flag is turned on and the effect timer is 0 in S574 (for example, step S576 in FIG. 78). The game machine is characterized in that the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped on the basis of a request to output a special on-edge signal.

  Further, the lock period determining means is configured to lock the lock based on a symbol position (for example, a pseudo stop start position) displayed on the symbol display means when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A gaming machine characterized by determining a period.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and a start operation detection means (for example, a start switch) that detects a start operation by the player 16S), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation by the player, and an internal winning combination determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The symbol variation that starts the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on the winning operation determining unit (for example, internal lottery processing by the main CPU 51) and the start operation detecting unit detecting the start operation. Start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation detection means The symbol variation stop control for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means within a predetermined maximum number of sliding symbols (for example, four symbols) based on the detection of the stop operation. Means (for example, a reel stop control process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51) and that a specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, cherry lip or strong cherry lip as an internal winning combination) Main effect means (for example, main CPU 51) for effecting (for example, special reel action) based on the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means, When the effect according to the symbol variation mode is performed, the lock start means (for example, the lock start means for invalidating the game operation by the player (for example, In-CPU 51) and a specific combination constituting a combination of symbols relating to the specific internal winning combination based on the fact that the lock is started by the lock starting means and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the position of the symbol (for example, the symbol position of symbols 12 and 17) where the symbol (for example, “cherry” symbol) is displayed on the symbol display means and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means In accordance with the position of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the pseudo stop start position), the lock period determining means for determining the lock period in which the lock continues (for example, as shown in FIG. 77 by the main CPU 51). The lock execution process at the start of the game) and the fact that the lock period determined by the lock period determination means has elapsed. Lock end means (for example, main CPU 51) for ending the lock, and the symbol variation stop control means is configured to stop the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means when the lock period is determined by the lock period determining means. Is detected until the lock is ended by the lock end means (for example, the special control flag is set in step S574 in FIG. 78). On the basis of the determination that the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, output of a special on-edge signal in step S576 in FIG. 78). The symbol is displayed at the position of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the request made) Gaming machine, characterized in that stop variation.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding symbols has been changed by using an effect (for example, special reel action) based on a pattern variation mode. Even if it is determined to be four frames, it is possible to remarkably improve the interest for the stop operation.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, a combination of symbols related to a specific internal winning combination (for example, cherry lip or strong cherry lip) (for example, a combination of symbols related to cherry lip A “cherry-ANY-ANY”) Since the constituent symbols (for example, the “cherry” symbol on the reel 3L) can be easily stopped, the player can easily detect that a specific internal winning combination has been established. It is possible to significantly improve the interest of

  Further, a stop operation continuation suggestion effect (for example, a stop operation continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 79) for notifying that the stop operation should be continued based on the effect produced by the symbol variation mode by the main effect means. It is characterized by further including an effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for executing the above.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to reliably enjoy an effect (for example, a special reel action) based on a pattern variation mode that can give the player the impression that the maximum number of sliding symbols has been changed.

  Although the present embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the specific configuration of each means included in the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the example adopted in the above-described embodiment, and can be arbitrarily modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are employed as the symbol display means, but a configuration using a liquid crystal display device instead of or in addition to this. It is good. In other words, the symbol image displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be variably displayed. Further, the display window may be a single display window 4, and a part of the symbols arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R may be displayed by the display window 4.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the internal winning combination determination means, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value generated by the random number generator 56 and performs the internal lottery process. Alternatively, a random number value may be acquired using a random number generation circuit (not shown) built in the main CPU 51.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, a start switch 16S that detects an operation to the start lever 16 is employed as a start operation detection means that detects a player's start operation, and a stop that detects a player's stop operation is detected. As the operation detection means, a stop switch 17S that detects an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is employed, but a touch panel switch may be used instead of or together with this.

  Further, for example, the various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 51 or the sub CPU 81 shown in the present embodiment are appropriately changed in the management mode without departing from the gist of the present invention. be able to. For example, various counters and various timers managed by “addition” may be managed by “subtraction”. In this case, whether or not “to be greater than or equal to” is determined by “to be less than or equal to”. The determination as to whether or not “exceeds” and the determination as to “exceeding to” shall be read as the determination as to whether or not “less than”. In addition, for example, various counters and various timers managed by “subtraction” may be managed by “addition”. The determination of whether or not is “over”, and the determination of “less than” is replaced with the determination of “over”.

  Further, for example, the various counters managed by the control of the main CPU 51 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 81 without departing from the gist of the present invention. Various counters managed by this control may be managed by the control of the main CPU 51 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Further, for example, the various game states managed by the control of the main CPU 51 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 81 within the scope of the present invention. Various game states managed by the control of the CPU 81 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 51 without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Note that all inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. it can.

1 Pachislot machine 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4L, 4C, 4R Display window 16 Start lever 16S Start switch 17L, 17C, 17R Stop button 17S Stop switch 41 Main control circuit 42 Sub control circuit 51 Main CPU
53 Main RAM
81 Sub CPU
83 Sub RAM

Claims (1)

Multiple reels that display multiple symbols in multiple rows,
Reel normal control means for normally controlling the plurality of reels in order to advance the game;
When a predetermined condition is established, reel effect content determination means for determining a type of effect according to the symbol variation mode of the plurality of reels;
A reel effect control means for controlling the effect according to the design variation mode of the plurality of reels,
The reel production control means includes
Reel effect selection data determining means for determining reel effect selection data associated with excitation output selection data for each of the plurality of reels according to the effect type determined by the reel effect content determining means; ,
Based on the reel effect selection data determined by the reel effect selection data determining means, the type of the excitation output table in which the rotation direction and the rotation amount of the reel are determined, or at least the effect for starting the effect on the reel Excitation output selection data determining means for determining, as excitation output selection data, the type of symbol position adjustment data indicating that the effect symbol position as the position should be adjusted;
When the symbol position adjustment data is determined as the excitation output selection data by the excitation output selection data determination unit, the effect symbol position adjustment unit that adjusts the effect symbol position,
The game symbol position adjusting means adjusts the effect symbol position by selecting the excitation output table corresponding to the type of symbol position adjustment data and the symbol pattern position.

Images